epoc32/include/e32cmn.inl
branchSymbian2
changeset 2 2fe1408b6811
parent 0 061f57f2323e
child 4 837f303aceeb
     1.1 --- a/epoc32/include/e32cmn.inl	Tue Nov 24 13:55:44 2009 +0000
     1.2 +++ b/epoc32/include/e32cmn.inl	Tue Mar 16 16:12:26 2010 +0000
     1.3 @@ -1,1 +1,7192 @@
     1.4 -e32cmn.inl
     1.5 +// Copyright (c) 1994-2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
     1.6 +// All rights reserved.
     1.7 +// This component and the accompanying materials are made available
     1.8 +// under the terms of the License "Symbian Foundation License v1.0" to Symbian Foundation members and "Symbian Foundation End User License Agreement v1.0" to non-members
     1.9 +// which accompanies this distribution, and is available
    1.10 +// at the URL "http://www.symbianfoundation.org/legal/licencesv10.html".
    1.11 +//
    1.12 +// Initial Contributors:
    1.13 +// Nokia Corporation - initial contribution.
    1.14 +//
    1.15 +// Contributors:
    1.16 +//
    1.17 +// Description:
    1.18 +// e32\include\e32cmn.inl
    1.19 +// 
    1.20 +//
    1.21 +
    1.22 +#ifndef __PLACEMENT_NEW_INLINE
    1.23 +#define __PLACEMENT_NEW_INLINE
    1.24 +// Global placement operator new
    1.25 +inline TAny* operator new(TUint /*aSize*/, TAny* aBase) __NO_THROW
    1.26 +	{return aBase;}
    1.27 +
    1.28 +// Global placement operator delete
    1.29 +inline void operator delete(TAny* /*aPtr*/, TAny* /*aBase*/) __NO_THROW
    1.30 +	{}
    1.31 +#endif //__PLACEMENT_NEW_INLINE
    1.32 +
    1.33 +#ifndef __PLACEMENT_VEC_NEW_INLINE
    1.34 +#define __PLACEMENT_VEC_NEW_INLINE
    1.35 +// Global placement operator new[]
    1.36 +inline TAny* operator new[](TUint /*aSize*/, TAny* aBase) __NO_THROW
    1.37 +	{return aBase;}
    1.38 +
    1.39 +// Global placement operator delete[]
    1.40 +inline void operator delete[](TAny* /*aPtr*/, TAny* /*aBase*/) __NO_THROW
    1.41 +	{}
    1.42 +#endif //__PLACEMENT_VEC_NEW_INLINE
    1.43 +
    1.44 +
    1.45 +// class RAllocator
    1.46 +inline RAllocator::RAllocator()
    1.47 +	{
    1.48 +	iAccessCount=1;
    1.49 +	iHandleCount=0;
    1.50 +	iHandles=0;
    1.51 +	iFlags=0;
    1.52 +	iCellCount=0;
    1.53 +	iTotalAllocSize=0;
    1.54 +	}
    1.55 +inline void RAllocator::__DbgMarkCheck(TBool aCountAll, TInt aCount, const TUint8* aFileName, TInt aLineNum)
    1.56 +	{__DbgMarkCheck(aCountAll, aCount, TPtrC8(aFileName), aLineNum);}
    1.57 +
    1.58 +// Class RHeap
    1.59 +inline RHeap::RHeap()
    1.60 +	{}
    1.61 +
    1.62 +/**
    1.63 +@return The maximum length to which the heap can grow.
    1.64 +
    1.65 +@publishedAll
    1.66 +@released
    1.67 +*/
    1.68 +inline TInt RHeap::MaxLength() const
    1.69 +	{return iMaxLength;}
    1.70 +
    1.71 +inline void RHeap::operator delete(TAny*, TAny*) 
    1.72 +/**
    1.73 +Called if constructor issued by operator new(TUint aSize, TAny* aBase) throws exception.
    1.74 +This is dummy as corresponding new operator does not allocate memory.
    1.75 +*/
    1.76 +	{}
    1.77 +
    1.78 +
    1.79 +inline TUint8* RHeap::Base() const
    1.80 +/**
    1.81 +Gets a pointer to the start of the heap.
    1.82 +	
    1.83 +Note that because of the small space overhead incurred by all allocated cells, 
    1.84 +no cell will have the same address as that returned by this function.
    1.85 +	
    1.86 +@return A pointer to the base of the heap.
    1.87 +*/
    1.88 +	{return iBase;}
    1.89 +
    1.90 +
    1.91 +
    1.92 +
    1.93 +inline TInt RHeap::Size() const
    1.94 +/**
    1.95 +Gets the current size of the heap.
    1.96 +
    1.97 +This is the total number of bytes committed by the host chunk. 
    1.98 +It is the requested size rounded up by page size minus the size of RHeap object(116 bytes)
    1.99 +minus the cell alignment overhead as shown:
   1.100 +
   1.101 +Size = (Rounded committed size - Size of RHeap - Cell Alignment Overhead).
   1.102 +
   1.103 +The cell alignment overhead varies between release builds and debug builds.
   1.104 +
   1.105 +Note that this value is always greater than the total space available across all allocated cells.
   1.106 +	
   1.107 +@return The size of the heap.
   1.108 +
   1.109 +@see Rheap::Available( )
   1.110 +*/
   1.111 +	{return iTop-iBase;}
   1.112 +
   1.113 +
   1.114 +
   1.115 +
   1.116 +inline TInt RHeap::Align(TInt a) const
   1.117 +/**
   1.118 +@internalComponent
   1.119 +*/
   1.120 +	{return _ALIGN_UP(a, iAlign);}
   1.121 +
   1.122 +
   1.123 +
   1.124 +
   1.125 +inline const TAny* RHeap::Align(const TAny* a) const
   1.126 +/**
   1.127 +@internalComponent
   1.128 +*/
   1.129 +	{return (const TAny*)_ALIGN_UP((TLinAddr)a, iAlign);}
   1.130 +
   1.131 +
   1.132 +
   1.133 +
   1.134 +inline TBool RHeap::IsLastCell(const SCell* aCell) const
   1.135 +/**
   1.136 +@internalComponent
   1.137 +*/
   1.138 +	{return (((TUint8*)aCell) + aCell->len) == iTop;}
   1.139 +
   1.140 +
   1.141 +
   1.142 +
   1.143 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
   1.144 +inline void RHeap::Lock() const
   1.145 +/**
   1.146 +@internalComponent
   1.147 +*/
   1.148 +	{((RFastLock&)iLock).Wait();}
   1.149 +
   1.150 +
   1.151 +
   1.152 +
   1.153 +inline void RHeap::Unlock() const
   1.154 +/**
   1.155 +@internalComponent
   1.156 +*/
   1.157 +	{((RFastLock&)iLock).Signal();}
   1.158 +
   1.159 +
   1.160 +inline TInt RHeap::ChunkHandle() const
   1.161 +/**
   1.162 +@internalComponent
   1.163 +*/
   1.164 +	{
   1.165 +	return iChunkHandle;
   1.166 +	}
   1.167 +#endif
   1.168 +
   1.169 +
   1.170 +
   1.171 +
   1.172 +// Class TRefByValue
   1.173 +template <class T>
   1.174 +inline TRefByValue<T>::TRefByValue(T &aRef)
   1.175 +	: iRef(aRef)
   1.176 +/**
   1.177 +Constructs this value reference for the specified referenced object.
   1.178 +
   1.179 +@param aRef The referenced object.
   1.180 +*/
   1.181 +	{}
   1.182 +
   1.183 +
   1.184 +
   1.185 +
   1.186 +template <class T>
   1.187 +inline TRefByValue<T>::operator T &()
   1.188 +/**
   1.189 +Gets a reference to the object encapsulated inside this value reference.
   1.190 +*/
   1.191 +	{return(iRef);}
   1.192 +
   1.193 +
   1.194 +
   1.195 +
   1.196 +/**
   1.197 +Creates the logical channel.
   1.198 +
   1.199 +@param aDevice    The name of the logical device for which the channel
   1.200 +                  is to be constructed. This is the name by which
   1.201 +				  the LDD factory object, i.e. the instance of
   1.202 +				  the DLogicalDevice derived class, is known.
   1.203 +@param aVer       The required version of the logical device. The driver
   1.204 +                  normally checks this against the version of the logical
   1.205 +				  channel, returning KErrNotSupported if the logical channel
   1.206 +				  is not compatible.
   1.207 +@param aUnit      A unit of the device. This argument only has meaning if
   1.208 +                  the flag KDeviceAllowUnit is set in the iParseMask data
   1.209 +				  member of the LDD factory object.
   1.210 +@param aDriver    A pointer to a descriptor containing the name of
   1.211 +                  a physical device. This is the name by which the PDD
   1.212 +				  factory object, i.e. the instance of the DPhysicalDevice
   1.213 +				  derived class, is known.
   1.214 +                  This is NULL, if no explicit name is to be supplied, or
   1.215 +				  the logical device does not require an accompanying physical
   1.216 +				  device.
   1.217 +@param aInfo      A pointer to an explicit 8-bit descriptor containing extra
   1.218 +                  information for the physical device. This argument only has
   1.219 +				  meaning if the KDeviceAllowInfo flag is set in the iParseMask
   1.220 +				  data member of the LDD factory object.
   1.221 +@param aType      An enumeration whose enumerators define the ownership of
   1.222 +                  this handle. If not explicitly specified, EOwnerProcess is
   1.223 +				  taken as default.
   1.224 +@param aTransferable If false, the channel is created as an object which is
   1.225 +                     local/private to the current process.
   1.226 +                     If true, the channel is an object which may be shared with
   1.227 +                     other processes using the IPC mechanisms for handle passing.
   1.228 +	
   1.229 +@return  KErrNone, if successful; otherwise one of the other system wide
   1.230 +         error codes.
   1.231 +*/
   1.232 +inline TInt RBusLogicalChannel::DoCreate(const TDesC& aDevice, const TVersion& aVer, TInt aUnit, const TDesC* aDriver, const TDesC8* aInfo, TOwnerType aType, TBool aTransferable)
   1.233 +	{ return DoCreate(aDevice, aVer, aUnit, aDriver, aInfo, (TInt)aType | (aTransferable?KCreateProtectedObject:0) ); }
   1.234 +
   1.235 +
   1.236 +
   1.237 +
   1.238 +// Class TChar
   1.239 +inline TChar::TChar()
   1.240 +/**
   1.241 +Default constructor.
   1.242 +
   1.243 +Constructs this character object with an undefined value.
   1.244 +*/
   1.245 +	{}
   1.246 +
   1.247 +
   1.248 +
   1.249 +
   1.250 +inline TChar::TChar(TUint aChar)
   1.251 +	: iChar(aChar)
   1.252 +/**
   1.253 +Constructs this character object and initialises it with the specified value.
   1.254 +
   1.255 +@param aChar The initialisation value.
   1.256 +*/
   1.257 +	{}
   1.258 +
   1.259 +
   1.260 +
   1.261 +
   1.262 +inline TChar& TChar::operator-=(TUint aChar)
   1.263 +/**
   1.264 +Subtracts an unsigned integer value from this character object.
   1.265 +
   1.266 +This character object is changed by the operation.
   1.267 +
   1.268 +@param aChar The value to be subtracted.
   1.269 +
   1.270 +@return A reference to this character object.
   1.271 +*/
   1.272 +	{iChar-=aChar;return(*this);}
   1.273 +
   1.274 +
   1.275 +
   1.276 +
   1.277 +inline TChar& TChar::operator+=(TUint aChar)
   1.278 +/**
   1.279 +Adds an unsigned integer value to this character object.
   1.280 +
   1.281 +This character object is changed by the operation.
   1.282 +
   1.283 +@param aChar The value to be added.
   1.284 +
   1.285 +@return A reference to this character object.
   1.286 +*/
   1.287 +	{iChar+=aChar;return(*this);}
   1.288 +
   1.289 +
   1.290 +
   1.291 +
   1.292 +inline TChar TChar::operator-(TUint aChar)
   1.293 +/**
   1.294 +Gets the result of subtracting an unsigned integer value from this character 
   1.295 +object.
   1.296 +
   1.297 +This character object is not changed.
   1.298 +
   1.299 +@param aChar The value to be subtracted.
   1.300 +
   1.301 +@return A character object whose value is the result of the subtraction
   1.302 +        operation.
   1.303 +*/
   1.304 +	{return(iChar-aChar);}
   1.305 +
   1.306 +
   1.307 +
   1.308 +
   1.309 +inline TChar TChar::operator+(TUint aChar)
   1.310 +/** 
   1.311 +Gets the result of adding an unsigned integer value to this character object. 
   1.312 +
   1.313 +This character object is not changed.
   1.314 +
   1.315 +@param aChar The value to be added.
   1.316 +
   1.317 +@return A character object whose value is the result of the addition operation.
   1.318 +*/
   1.319 +	{return(iChar+aChar);}
   1.320 +
   1.321 +
   1.322 +
   1.323 +
   1.324 +inline TChar::operator TUint() const
   1.325 +/**
   1.326 +Gets the value of the character as an unsigned integer. 
   1.327 +
   1.328 +The operator casts a TChar to a TUint, returning the TUint value wrapped by
   1.329 +this character object.
   1.330 +*/
   1.331 +	{return(iChar);}
   1.332 +
   1.333 +
   1.334 +
   1.335 +
   1.336 +// Class TDesC8
   1.337 +inline TBool TDesC8::operator<(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
   1.338 +/**
   1.339 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is less than the specified
   1.340 +descriptor's data.
   1.341 +
   1.342 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
   1.343 +
   1.344 +@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
   1.345 +            with this descriptor's data.
   1.346 +            
   1.347 +@return True if greater than or equal, false otherwise.
   1.348 +
   1.349 +@see TDesC8::Compare
   1.350 +*/
   1.351 +	{return(Compare(aDes)<0);}
   1.352 +
   1.353 +
   1.354 +
   1.355 +
   1.356 +inline TBool TDesC8::operator<=(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
   1.357 +/**
   1.358 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is less than or equal to the
   1.359 +specified descriptor's data.
   1.360 +
   1.361 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
   1.362 +
   1.363 +@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
   1.364 +            with this descriptor's data. 
   1.365 +            
   1.366 +@return True if less than or equal, false otherwise. 
   1.367 +
   1.368 +@see TDesC8::Compare
   1.369 +*/
   1.370 +	{return(Compare(aDes)<=0);}
   1.371 +
   1.372 +
   1.373 +
   1.374 +
   1.375 +inline TBool TDesC8::operator>(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
   1.376 +/**
   1.377 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is greater than the specified
   1.378 +descriptor's data.
   1.379 +
   1.380 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
   1.381 +
   1.382 +@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
   1.383 +            with this descriptor's data. 
   1.384 +            
   1.385 +@return True if greater than, false otherwise. 
   1.386 +
   1.387 +@see TDesC8::Compare
   1.388 +*/
   1.389 +	{return(Compare(aDes)>0);}
   1.390 +
   1.391 +
   1.392 +
   1.393 +
   1.394 +inline TBool TDesC8::operator>=(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
   1.395 +/**
   1.396 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is greater than or equal to the
   1.397 +specified descriptor's data.
   1.398 +
   1.399 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
   1.400 +
   1.401 +@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
   1.402 +            with this descriptor's data. 
   1.403 +            
   1.404 +@return True if greater than, false otherwise.
   1.405 +
   1.406 +@see TDesC8::Compare
   1.407 +*/
   1.408 +	{return(Compare(aDes)>=0);}
   1.409 +
   1.410 +
   1.411 +
   1.412 +
   1.413 +inline TBool TDesC8::operator==(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
   1.414 +/**
   1.415 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is equal to the specified
   1.416 +descriptor's data.
   1.417 +
   1.418 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
   1.419 +
   1.420 +@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
   1.421 +            with this descriptor's data. 
   1.422 +            
   1.423 +@return True if equal, false otherwise. 
   1.424 +
   1.425 +@see TDesC8::Compare
   1.426 +*/
   1.427 +	{return(Compare(aDes)==0);}
   1.428 +
   1.429 +
   1.430 +
   1.431 +
   1.432 +inline TBool TDesC8::operator!=(const TDesC8 &aDes) const
   1.433 +/**
   1.434 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is not equal to the specified
   1.435 +descriptor's data.
   1.436 +
   1.437 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
   1.438 +
   1.439 +@param aDes The 8-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
   1.440 +            with this descriptor's data. 
   1.441 +            
   1.442 +@return True if not equal, false otherwise. 
   1.443 +
   1.444 +@see TDesC8::Compare
   1.445 +*/
   1.446 +	{return(Compare(aDes)!=0);}
   1.447 +
   1.448 +
   1.449 +
   1.450 +
   1.451 +inline const TUint8 &TDesC8::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
   1.452 +/**
   1.453 +Gets a reference to a single data item within this descriptor's data.
   1.454 +
   1.455 +@param anIndex The position of the individual data item within the descriptor's 
   1.456 +               data. This is an offset value; a zero value refers to the
   1.457 +               leftmost data position. 
   1.458 +               
   1.459 +@return A reference to the data item.
   1.460 +
   1.461 +@panic USER 21, if anIndex is negative or greater than or equal to the current
   1.462 +                length of the descriptor.
   1.463 +*/
   1.464 +	{return(AtC(anIndex));}
   1.465 +
   1.466 +
   1.467 +
   1.468 +
   1.469 +inline TInt TDesC8::Length() const
   1.470 +/**
   1.471 +Gets the length of the data.
   1.472 +
   1.473 +This is the number of 8-bit values or data items represented by the descriptor.
   1.474 +
   1.475 +@return The length of the data represented by the descriptor.
   1.476 +*/
   1.477 +	{return(iLength&KMaskDesLength8);}
   1.478 +
   1.479 +
   1.480 +
   1.481 +
   1.482 +inline TInt TDesC8::Size() const
   1.483 +/**
   1.484 +Gets the size of the data.
   1.485 +
   1.486 +This is the number of bytes occupied by the data represented by the descriptor.
   1.487 +
   1.488 +@return The size of the data represented by the descriptor.
   1.489 +*/
   1.490 +	{return(Length());}
   1.491 +
   1.492 +
   1.493 +
   1.494 +
   1.495 +inline void TDesC8::DoSetLength(TInt aLength)
   1.496 +	{iLength=(iLength&(~KMaskDesLength8))|aLength;}
   1.497 +
   1.498 +
   1.499 +
   1.500 +
   1.501 +// Class TPtrC8
   1.502 +inline void TPtrC8::Set(const TUint8 *aBuf,TInt aLength)
   1.503 +/**
   1.504 +Sets the 8-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor to point to the specified 
   1.505 +location in memory, whether in RAM or ROM.
   1.506 +
   1.507 +The length of the descriptor is set to the specified length.
   1.508 +
   1.509 +@param aBuf    A pointer to the location that the descriptor is to represent.
   1.510 +@param aLength The length of the descriptor. This value must be non-negative.
   1.511 +
   1.512 +@panic USER 29, if aLength is negative.
   1.513 +*/
   1.514 +	{new(this) TPtrC8(aBuf,aLength);}
   1.515 +
   1.516 +
   1.517 +
   1.518 +
   1.519 +inline void TPtrC8::Set(const TDesC8 &aDes)
   1.520 +/**
   1.521 +Sets the 8-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor from the specified descriptor.
   1.522 +
   1.523 +It is set to point to the same data and is given the same length.
   1.524 +
   1.525 +@param aDes A reference to an 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
   1.526 +*/
   1.527 +	{new(this) TPtrC8(aDes);}
   1.528 +
   1.529 +
   1.530 +
   1.531 +
   1.532 +inline void TPtrC8::Set(const TPtrC8& aPtr)
   1.533 +/**
   1.534 +Sets the 8-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor from the specified
   1.535 +non-modifiable pointer descriptor.
   1.536 +
   1.537 +It is set to point to the same data and is given the same length.
   1.538 +
   1.539 +@param aPtr A reference to an 8-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor.
   1.540 +*/
   1.541 +	{new(this) TPtrC8(aPtr);}
   1.542 +
   1.543 +
   1.544 +
   1.545 +
   1.546 +
   1.547 +// class TBufCBase8
   1.548 +inline TPtr8 TBufCBase8::DoDes(TInt aMaxLength)
   1.549 +	{return TPtr8(*this,aMaxLength);}
   1.550 +
   1.551 +
   1.552 +
   1.553 +
   1.554 +// Template class TBufC8
   1.555 +template <TInt S>
   1.556 +inline TBufC8<S>::TBufC8()
   1.557 +	: TBufCBase8()
   1.558 +/** 
   1.559 +Constructs an empty 8-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
   1.560 +
   1.561 +It contains no data.
   1.562 +
   1.563 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which 
   1.564 +is created as part of the buffer descriptor object.
   1.565 +
   1.566 +Data can, subsequently, be assigned into this buffer descriptor using the 
   1.567 +assignment operators.
   1.568 +
   1.569 +@see TBufC8::operator=
   1.570 +*/
   1.571 +	{}
   1.572 +
   1.573 +
   1.574 +
   1.575 +
   1.576 +template <TInt S>
   1.577 +inline TBufC8<S>::TBufC8(const TUint8 *aString)
   1.578 +	: TBufCBase8(aString,S)
   1.579 +/**
   1.580 +Constructs the 8-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor from a zero terminated 
   1.581 +string.
   1.582 +
   1.583 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which 
   1.584 +is created as part of this object.
   1.585 +
   1.586 +The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer descriptor's 
   1.587 +data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the 
   1.588 +string, excluding the zero terminator.
   1.589 +
   1.590 +@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
   1.591 +
   1.592 +@panic USER 20, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
   1.593 +                greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
   1.594 +*/
   1.595 +	{}
   1.596 +
   1.597 +
   1.598 +
   1.599 +
   1.600 +template <TInt S>
   1.601 +inline TBufC8<S>::TBufC8(const TDesC8 &aDes)
   1.602 +	: TBufCBase8(aDes,S)
   1.603 +/**
   1.604 +Constructs the 8-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor from any
   1.605 +existing descriptor.
   1.606 +
   1.607 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which 
   1.608 +is created as part of this object.
   1.609 +
   1.610 +Data is copied from the source descriptor into this buffer descriptor and 
   1.611 +the length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the
   1.612 +source descriptor.
   1.613 +
   1.614 +@param aDes The source 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
   1.615 +
   1.616 +@panic USER 20, if the length of the source descriptor is
   1.617 +                greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
   1.618 +*/
   1.619 +	{}
   1.620 +
   1.621 +
   1.622 +
   1.623 +
   1.624 +template <TInt S>
   1.625 +inline TBufC8<S> &TBufC8<S>::operator=(const TUint8 *aString)
   1.626 +/**
   1.627 +Copies data into this descriptor, replacing any existing data.
   1.628 +
   1.629 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.630 +
   1.631 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string. 
   1.632 +
   1.633 +@return A reference to this descriptor.
   1.634 +
   1.635 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
   1.636 +                greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
   1.637 +*/
   1.638 +	{Copy(aString,S);return(*this);}
   1.639 +
   1.640 +
   1.641 +
   1.642 +
   1.643 +template <TInt S>
   1.644 +inline TBufC8<S> &TBufC8<S>::operator=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
   1.645 +/**
   1.646 +Copies data into this descriptor, replacing any existing data.
   1.647 +
   1.648 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.649 +
   1.650 +@param aDes An 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor. 
   1.651 +
   1.652 +@return A reference to this descriptor.
   1.653 +
   1.654 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is
   1.655 +                greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
   1.656 +*/
   1.657 +	{Copy(aDes,S);return(*this);}
   1.658 +
   1.659 +
   1.660 +
   1.661 +
   1.662 +template <TInt S>
   1.663 +inline TPtr8 TBufC8<S>::Des()
   1.664 +/**
   1.665 +Creates and returns an 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor for the data
   1.666 +represented by this 8-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
   1.667 +
   1.668 +The content of a non-modifiable buffer descriptor normally cannot be altered, 
   1.669 +other than by complete replacement of the data. Creating a modifiable pointer 
   1.670 +descriptor provides a way of changing the data.
   1.671 +
   1.672 +The modifiable pointer descriptor is set to point to this non-modifiable buffer 
   1.673 +descriptor's data.
   1.674 +
   1.675 +The length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the length of this 
   1.676 +non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
   1.677 +
   1.678 +The maximum length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the value 
   1.679 +of the integer template parameter.
   1.680 +
   1.681 +When data is modified through this new pointer descriptor, the lengths of 
   1.682 +both it and this constant buffer descriptor are changed.
   1.683 +
   1.684 +@return An 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor representing the data in this 
   1.685 +        8-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
   1.686 +*/
   1.687 +	{return DoDes(S);}
   1.688 +
   1.689 +
   1.690 +
   1.691 +
   1.692 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
   1.693 +// Class HBufC8
   1.694 +inline HBufC8 &HBufC8::operator=(const HBufC8 &aLcb)
   1.695 +/**
   1.696 +Copies data into this 8-bit heap descriptor replacing any existing data.
   1.697 +
   1.698 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.699 +
   1.700 +Note that the maximum length of this (target) descriptor is the length
   1.701 +of the descriptor buffer in the allocated host heap cell; this may be greater
   1.702 +than the maximum length specified when this descriptor was created or
   1.703 +last re-allocated.
   1.704 +
   1.705 +@param aLcb The source 8-bit heap descriptor.
   1.706 +
   1.707 +@return A reference to this 8-bit heap descriptor.
   1.708 +
   1.709 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aLcb is greater than the
   1.710 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor
   1.711 +*/
   1.712 +	{return *this=static_cast<const TDesC8&>(aLcb);}
   1.713 +
   1.714 +
   1.715 +
   1.716 +
   1.717 +// Class RBuf8
   1.718 +inline RBuf8& RBuf8::operator=(const TUint8* aString)
   1.719 +/**
   1.720 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
   1.721 +
   1.722 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.723 +
   1.724 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
   1.725 +
   1.726 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
   1.727 +
   1.728 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
   1.729 +                greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
   1.730 +*/
   1.731 +    {Copy(aString);return(*this);}
   1.732 +
   1.733 +
   1.734 +
   1.735 +
   1.736 +inline RBuf8& RBuf8::operator=(const TDesC8& aDes)
   1.737 +/**
   1.738 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
   1.739 +
   1.740 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.741 +
   1.742 +@param aDes An 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
   1.743 +
   1.744 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
   1.745 +
   1.746 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
   1.747 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
   1.748 +*/
   1.749 +    {Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
   1.750 +
   1.751 +
   1.752 +
   1.753 +
   1.754 +inline RBuf8& RBuf8::operator=(const RBuf8& aDes)
   1.755 +/**
   1.756 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
   1.757 +
   1.758 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.759 +
   1.760 +@param aDes A 8-bit buffer descriptor.
   1.761 +
   1.762 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
   1.763 +
   1.764 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
   1.765 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
   1.766 +*/
   1.767 +    {Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
   1.768 +
   1.769 +
   1.770 +
   1.771 +
   1.772 +/**
   1.773 +Creates an 8-bit resizable buffer descriptor that has been initialised with
   1.774 +data from the specified read stream; leaves on failure.
   1.775 +			 
   1.776 +Data is assigned to the new descriptor from the specified stream.
   1.777 +This variant assumes that the stream contains the length of the data followed
   1.778 +by the data itself.
   1.779 +
   1.780 +The function is implemented by calling the HBufC8::NewL(RReadStream&amp;,TInt)
   1.781 +variant and then assigning the resulting heap descriptor using
   1.782 +the RBuf8::Assign(HBufC8*) variant. The comments that describe
   1.783 +the HBufC8::NewL() variant	also apply to this RBuf8::CreateL() function.
   1.784 +
   1.785 +The function may leave with one of the system-wide error codes,	specifically 
   1.786 +KErrOverflow, if the length of the data as read from the stream is greater than
   1.787 +the upper limit as specified by the aMaxLength parameter.
   1.788 +
   1.789 +@param aStream    The stream from which the data length and the data to be
   1.790 +                  assigned to the new descriptor, are taken.
   1.791 +@param aMaxLength The upper limit on the length of data that the descriptor is
   1.792 +                  to represent. The value of this parameter must be non-negative
   1.793 +                  otherwise the	underlying function will panic.
   1.794 +*/
   1.795 +inline void RBuf8::CreateL(RReadStream &aStream,TInt aMaxLength)
   1.796 +	{
   1.797 +	Assign(HBufC8::NewL(aStream,aMaxLength));
   1.798 +	}
   1.799 +#endif
   1.800 +
   1.801 +
   1.802 +
   1.803 +
   1.804 +// Class TDes8
   1.805 +inline TDes8 &TDes8::operator=(const TUint8 *aString)
   1.806 +/**
   1.807 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
   1.808 +
   1.809 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.810 +
   1.811 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
   1.812 +
   1.813 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
   1.814 +
   1.815 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
   1.816 +                greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
   1.817 +*/
   1.818 +    {Copy(aString);return(*this);}
   1.819 +
   1.820 +
   1.821 +
   1.822 +
   1.823 +inline TDes8 &TDes8::operator=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
   1.824 +/**
   1.825 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
   1.826 +
   1.827 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.828 +
   1.829 +@param aDes An 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor. 
   1.830 + 
   1.831 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
   1.832 +
   1.833 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
   1.834 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
   1.835 +*/
   1.836 +    {Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
   1.837 +
   1.838 +
   1.839 +
   1.840 +
   1.841 +inline TDes8 &TDes8::operator=(const TDes8 &aDes)
   1.842 +/**
   1.843 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
   1.844 +
   1.845 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.846 +
   1.847 +@param aDes An 8-bit modifiable descriptor.
   1.848 +
   1.849 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
   1.850 +
   1.851 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
   1.852 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
   1.853 +*/
   1.854 +    {Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
   1.855 +
   1.856 +
   1.857 +
   1.858 +
   1.859 +inline TDes8 &TDes8::operator+=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
   1.860 +/**
   1.861 +Appends data onto the end of this descriptor's data and returns a reference 
   1.862 +to this descriptor.
   1.863 +
   1.864 +The length of this descriptor is incremented to reflect the new content.
   1.865 +
   1.866 +@param aDes An-8 bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be appended.
   1.867 +
   1.868 +@return A reference to this descriptor.
   1.869 +
   1.870 +@panic USER 23, if the resulting length of this descriptor is greater than its
   1.871 +                maximum length.  
   1.872 +*/
   1.873 +	{Append(aDes);return(*this);}
   1.874 +
   1.875 +
   1.876 +
   1.877 +
   1.878 +inline const TUint8 &TDes8::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
   1.879 +/**
   1.880 +Gets a const reference to a single data item within this descriptor's data.
   1.881 +
   1.882 +@param anIndex The position of the data item within this descriptor's data.
   1.883 +               This is an offset value; a zero value refers to the leftmost
   1.884 +			   data position.
   1.885 +
   1.886 +@return A const reference to the data item at the specified position. 
   1.887 +
   1.888 +@panic USER 21, if anIndex is negative or is greater than or equal to the
   1.889 +                current length of this descriptor.
   1.890 +*/
   1.891 +	{return(AtC(anIndex));}
   1.892 +
   1.893 +
   1.894 +
   1.895 +
   1.896 +inline TUint8 &TDes8::operator[](TInt anIndex)
   1.897 +/**
   1.898 +Gets a non-const reference to a single data item within this descriptor's 
   1.899 +data.
   1.900 +
   1.901 +@param anIndex The position of the data item within this descriptor's data.
   1.902 +               This is an offset value; a zero value refers to the leftmost
   1.903 +			   data position.
   1.904 +
   1.905 +@return A non-const reference to the data item at the specified position.
   1.906 +
   1.907 +@panic USER 21, if anIndex is negative or is greater than or equal to the
   1.908 +                current length of this descriptor.
   1.909 +*/
   1.910 +	{return((TUint8 &)AtC(anIndex));}
   1.911 +
   1.912 +
   1.913 +
   1.914 +
   1.915 +inline TInt TDes8::MaxLength() const
   1.916 +/**
   1.917 +Gets the maximum length of the descriptor.
   1.918 +
   1.919 +This is the upper limit for the number of 8-bit values or data items that
   1.920 +the descriptor can represent.
   1.921 +
   1.922 +@return The maximum length of data that the descriptor can represent.
   1.923 +*/
   1.924 +	{return(iMaxLength);}
   1.925 +
   1.926 +
   1.927 +
   1.928 +
   1.929 +inline TInt TDes8::MaxSize() const
   1.930 +/**
   1.931 +Gets the maximum size of the descriptor.
   1.932 +
   1.933 +This is the upper limit for the number of bytes which the data represented by
   1.934 +the descriptor can occupy.
   1.935 +
   1.936 +@return The maximum size of the descriptor data.
   1.937 +*/
   1.938 +	{return(iMaxLength);}
   1.939 +
   1.940 +
   1.941 +
   1.942 +
   1.943 +inline TUint8 * TDes8::WPtr() const
   1.944 +	{return((TUint8 *)Ptr());}
   1.945 +
   1.946 +
   1.947 +
   1.948 +
   1.949 +// Class TPtr8
   1.950 +inline TPtr8 &TPtr8::operator=(const TUint8 *aString)
   1.951 +/**
   1.952 +Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing any
   1.953 +existing data.
   1.954 +
   1.955 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.956 +
   1.957 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
   1.958 +
   1.959 +@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
   1.960 +
   1.961 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
   1.962 +                greater than the maximum length of this descriptor.
   1.963 +*/
   1.964 +	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
   1.965 +
   1.966 +
   1.967 +
   1.968 +
   1.969 +inline TPtr8 &TPtr8::operator=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
   1.970 +/**
   1.971 +Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing any
   1.972 +existing data.
   1.973 +
   1.974 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.975 +
   1.976 +@param aDes An 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor whose data is to be copied 
   1.977 +            into this descriptor.
   1.978 +
   1.979 +@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
   1.980 +
   1.981 +@panic USER 23, if the length of aDes is greater than the maximum 
   1.982 +                length of this descriptor.
   1.983 +*/
   1.984 +	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
   1.985 +
   1.986 +
   1.987 +
   1.988 +
   1.989 +inline TPtr8 &TPtr8::operator=(const TPtr8 &aDes)
   1.990 +/**
   1.991 +Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing any
   1.992 +existing data.
   1.993 +
   1.994 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
   1.995 +
   1.996 +@param aDes An 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor whose data is to be copied
   1.997 +            into this descriptor.
   1.998 +
   1.999 +@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
  1.1000 +
  1.1001 +@panic USER 23, if the length of aDes is greater than the maximum 
  1.1002 +                length of this descriptor.
  1.1003 +*/
  1.1004 +	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.1005 +
  1.1006 +
  1.1007 +
  1.1008 +
  1.1009 +inline void TPtr8::Set(TUint8 *aBuf,TInt aLength,TInt aMaxLength)
  1.1010 +/**
  1.1011 +Sets the 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor to point to the specified location
  1.1012 +in memory, whether in RAM or ROM.
  1.1013 +
  1.1014 +The length of the descriptor and its maximum length are set to the specified
  1.1015 +values.
  1.1016 +
  1.1017 +@param aBuf       A pointer to the location that the descriptor is to represent.
  1.1018 +@param aLength    The length of the descriptor.
  1.1019 +@param aMaxLength The maximum length of the descriptor.
  1.1020 +
  1.1021 +@panic USER 20, if aLength is negative or is greater than the maximum length of
  1.1022 +                this descriptor.
  1.1023 +@panic USER 30, if aMaxLength is negative.
  1.1024 +*/
  1.1025 +	{new(this) TPtr8(aBuf,aLength,aMaxLength);}
  1.1026 +
  1.1027 +
  1.1028 +
  1.1029 +
  1.1030 +inline void TPtr8::Set(const TPtr8 &aPtr)
  1.1031 +/**
  1.1032 +Sets the 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor from an existing 8-bit modifiable
  1.1033 +pointer descriptor.
  1.1034 +  
  1.1035 +It is set to point to the same data, is given the same length and the same
  1.1036 +maximum length as the source pointer descriptor.
  1.1037 +
  1.1038 +@param aPtr The source 8-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
  1.1039 +*/
  1.1040 +	{new(this) TPtr8(aPtr);}
  1.1041 +
  1.1042 +
  1.1043 +
  1.1044 +
  1.1045 +// Template class TBuf8
  1.1046 +template <TInt S>
  1.1047 +inline TBuf8<S>::TBuf8()
  1.1048 +	: TBufBase8(S)
  1.1049 +/**
  1.1050 +Constructs an empty 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.1051 +
  1.1052 +It contains no data.
  1.1053 +
  1.1054 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is created 
  1.1055 +as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.1056 +*/
  1.1057 +	{}
  1.1058 +
  1.1059 +
  1.1060 +
  1.1061 +
  1.1062 +template <TInt S>
  1.1063 +inline TBuf8<S>::TBuf8(TInt aLength)
  1.1064 +	: TBufBase8(aLength,S)
  1.1065 +/**
  1.1066 +Constructs an empty 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor and sets the its length 
  1.1067 +to the specified value.
  1.1068 +
  1.1069 +No data is assigned to the descriptor.
  1.1070 +
  1.1071 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is created 
  1.1072 +as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.1073 +
  1.1074 +@param aLength The length of this modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.1075 +
  1.1076 +@panic USER 20, if aLength is negative or is greater than the 
  1.1077 +                value of the integer template parameter.
  1.1078 +*/
  1.1079 +	{}
  1.1080 +
  1.1081 +
  1.1082 +
  1.1083 +
  1.1084 +template <TInt S>
  1.1085 +inline TBuf8<S>::TBuf8(const TUint8 *aString)
  1.1086 +	: TBufBase8(aString,S)
  1.1087 +/**
  1.1088 +Constructs the 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from a
  1.1089 +zero terminated string.
  1.1090 +
  1.1091 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that
  1.1092 +is created as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.1093 +
  1.1094 +The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer
  1.1095 +descriptor's data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the
  1.1096 +length of the string, excluding the zero terminator.
  1.1097 +
  1.1098 +@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
  1.1099 +
  1.1100 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
  1.1101 +                is greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
  1.1102 +*/
  1.1103 +	{}
  1.1104 +
  1.1105 +
  1.1106 +
  1.1107 +
  1.1108 +template <TInt S>
  1.1109 +inline TBuf8<S>::TBuf8(const TDesC8 &aDes)
  1.1110 +	: TBufBase8(aDes,S)
  1.1111 +/**
  1.1112 +Constructs the 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from any existing
  1.1113 +8-bit descriptor.
  1.1114 +
  1.1115 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created 
  1.1116 +as part of this object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.1117 +
  1.1118 +Data is copied from the source descriptor into this modifiable buffer
  1.1119 +descriptor and the length of this modifiable buffer descriptor is set to
  1.1120 +the length of the source descriptor.
  1.1121 +
  1.1122 +@param aDes The source 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.1123 +
  1.1124 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the source descriptor is greater than the
  1.1125 +                value of the integer template parameter.
  1.1126 +*/
  1.1127 +	{}
  1.1128 +
  1.1129 +
  1.1130 +
  1.1131 +
  1.1132 +template <TInt S>
  1.1133 +inline TBuf8<S> &TBuf8<S>::operator=(const TUint8 *aString)
  1.1134 +/**
  1.1135 +Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any
  1.1136 +existing data.
  1.1137 +
  1.1138 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1139 +
  1.1140 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
  1.1141 +
  1.1142 +@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor. 
  1.1143 +
  1.1144 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
  1.1145 +                is greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.1146 +*/
  1.1147 +	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
  1.1148 +
  1.1149 +
  1.1150 +
  1.1151 +
  1.1152 +template <TInt S>
  1.1153 +inline TBuf8<S> &TBuf8<S>::operator=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
  1.1154 +/**
  1.1155 +Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any
  1.1156 +existing data.
  1.1157 +
  1.1158 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1159 +
  1.1160 +@param aDes An 8 bit non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.1161 +
  1.1162 +@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor. 
  1.1163 +
  1.1164 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
  1.1165 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.1166 +*/
  1.1167 +	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.1168 +
  1.1169 +
  1.1170 +
  1.1171 +
  1.1172 +template <TInt S>
  1.1173 +inline TBuf8<S>& TBuf8<S>::operator=(const TBuf8<S>& aBuf)
  1.1174 +/**
  1.1175 +Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor replacing any
  1.1176 +existing data.
  1.1177 +
  1.1178 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1179 +
  1.1180 +@param aBuf The source 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor with the same
  1.1181 +            template value.
  1.1182 +
  1.1183 +@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor. 
  1.1184 +*/
  1.1185 +	{Copy(aBuf);return *this;}
  1.1186 +
  1.1187 +
  1.1188 +
  1.1189 +
  1.1190 +// Template class TAlignedBuf8
  1.1191 +template <TInt S>
  1.1192 +inline TAlignedBuf8<S>::TAlignedBuf8()
  1.1193 +	: TBufBase8(S)
  1.1194 +/**
  1.1195 +Constructs an empty 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.1196 +
  1.1197 +It contains no data.
  1.1198 +
  1.1199 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is created 
  1.1200 +as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.1201 +*/
  1.1202 +	{}
  1.1203 +
  1.1204 +
  1.1205 +
  1.1206 +
  1.1207 +template <TInt S>
  1.1208 +inline TAlignedBuf8<S>::TAlignedBuf8(TInt aLength)
  1.1209 +	: TBufBase8(aLength,S)
  1.1210 +/**
  1.1211 +Constructs an empty 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor and sets the its length 
  1.1212 +to the specified value.
  1.1213 +
  1.1214 +No data is assigned to the descriptor.
  1.1215 +
  1.1216 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is created 
  1.1217 +as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.1218 +
  1.1219 +@param aLength The length of this modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.1220 +
  1.1221 +@panic USER 20, if aLength is negative or is greater than the 
  1.1222 +                value of the integer template parameter.
  1.1223 +*/
  1.1224 +	{}
  1.1225 +
  1.1226 +
  1.1227 +
  1.1228 +
  1.1229 +template <TInt S>
  1.1230 +inline TAlignedBuf8<S>::TAlignedBuf8(const TUint8 *aString)
  1.1231 +	: TBufBase8(aString,S)
  1.1232 +/**
  1.1233 +Constructs the 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from a
  1.1234 +zero terminated string.
  1.1235 +
  1.1236 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that
  1.1237 +is created as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.1238 +
  1.1239 +The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer
  1.1240 +descriptor's data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the
  1.1241 +length of the string, excluding the zero terminator.
  1.1242 +
  1.1243 +@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
  1.1244 +
  1.1245 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
  1.1246 +                is greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
  1.1247 +*/
  1.1248 +	{}
  1.1249 +
  1.1250 +
  1.1251 +
  1.1252 +
  1.1253 +template <TInt S>
  1.1254 +inline TAlignedBuf8<S>::TAlignedBuf8(const TDesC8 &aDes)
  1.1255 +	: TBufBase8(aDes,S)
  1.1256 +/**
  1.1257 +Constructs the 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from any existing
  1.1258 +8-bit descriptor.
  1.1259 +
  1.1260 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created 
  1.1261 +as part of this object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.1262 +
  1.1263 +Data is copied from the source descriptor into this modifiable buffer
  1.1264 +descriptor and the length of this modifiable buffer descriptor is set to
  1.1265 +the length of the source descriptor.
  1.1266 +
  1.1267 +@param aDes The source 8-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.1268 +
  1.1269 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the source descriptor is greater than the
  1.1270 +                value of the integer template parameter.
  1.1271 +*/
  1.1272 +	{}
  1.1273 +
  1.1274 +
  1.1275 +
  1.1276 +
  1.1277 +template <TInt S>
  1.1278 +inline TAlignedBuf8<S> &TAlignedBuf8<S>::operator=(const TUint8 *aString)
  1.1279 +/**
  1.1280 +Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any
  1.1281 +existing data.
  1.1282 +
  1.1283 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1284 +
  1.1285 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
  1.1286 +
  1.1287 +@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor. 
  1.1288 +
  1.1289 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
  1.1290 +                is greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.1291 +*/
  1.1292 +	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
  1.1293 +
  1.1294 +
  1.1295 +
  1.1296 +
  1.1297 +template <TInt S>
  1.1298 +inline TAlignedBuf8<S> &TAlignedBuf8<S>::operator=(const TDesC8 &aDes)
  1.1299 +/**
  1.1300 +Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any
  1.1301 +existing data.
  1.1302 +
  1.1303 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1304 +
  1.1305 +@param aDes An 8 bit non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.1306 +
  1.1307 +@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor. 
  1.1308 +
  1.1309 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
  1.1310 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.1311 +*/
  1.1312 +	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.1313 +
  1.1314 +
  1.1315 +
  1.1316 +
  1.1317 +template <TInt S>
  1.1318 +inline TAlignedBuf8<S>& TAlignedBuf8<S>::operator=(const TAlignedBuf8<S>& aBuf)
  1.1319 +/**
  1.1320 +Copies data into this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor replacing any
  1.1321 +existing data.
  1.1322 +
  1.1323 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1324 +
  1.1325 +@param aBuf The source 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor with the same
  1.1326 +            template value.
  1.1327 +
  1.1328 +@return A reference to this 8-bit modifiable buffer descriptor. 
  1.1329 +*/
  1.1330 +	{Copy(aBuf);return *this;}
  1.1331 +
  1.1332 +
  1.1333 +
  1.1334 +
  1.1335 +// Template class TLitC8
  1.1336 +template <TInt S>
  1.1337 +inline const TDesC8* TLitC8<S>::operator&() const
  1.1338 +/**
  1.1339 +Returns a const TDesC8 type pointer.
  1.1340 +
  1.1341 +@return A descriptor type pointer to this literal. 
  1.1342 +*/
  1.1343 +	{return REINTERPRET_CAST(const TDesC8*,this);}
  1.1344 +
  1.1345 +
  1.1346 +
  1.1347 +
  1.1348 +template <TInt S>
  1.1349 +inline const TDesC8& TLitC8<S>::operator()() const
  1.1350 +/**
  1.1351 +Returns a const TDesC8 type reference.
  1.1352 +
  1.1353 +@return A descriptor type reference to this literal 
  1.1354 +*/
  1.1355 +	{return *operator&();}
  1.1356 +
  1.1357 +
  1.1358 +
  1.1359 +
  1.1360 +template <TInt S>
  1.1361 +inline TLitC8<S>::operator const TDesC8&() const
  1.1362 +/**
  1.1363 +Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC8<TInt> type is passed to a function
  1.1364 +which is prototyped to take a const TDesC8& type.
  1.1365 +*/
  1.1366 +	{return *operator&();}
  1.1367 +
  1.1368 +
  1.1369 +
  1.1370 +template <TInt S>
  1.1371 +inline TLitC8<S>::operator const __TRefDesC8() const
  1.1372 +/**
  1.1373 +Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC8<TInt> type is passed to a function
  1.1374 +which is prototyped to take a const TRefByValue<const TDesC8> type.
  1.1375 +
  1.1376 +@see __TRefDesC8
  1.1377 +*/
  1.1378 +	{return *operator&();}
  1.1379 +
  1.1380 +
  1.1381 +
  1.1382 +
  1.1383 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.1384 +// Class TDesC16
  1.1385 +inline TBool TDesC16::operator<(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
  1.1386 +/**
  1.1387 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is less than the specified descriptor's 
  1.1388 +data.
  1.1389 +
  1.1390 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
  1.1391 +
  1.1392 +@param aDes The 16-bit non-modifable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
  1.1393 +            with this descriptor's data. 
  1.1394 +
  1.1395 +@return True if less than, false otherwise. 
  1.1396 +
  1.1397 +@see TDesC16::Compare
  1.1398 +*/
  1.1399 +	{return(Compare(aDes)<0);}
  1.1400 +
  1.1401 +
  1.1402 +
  1.1403 +
  1.1404 +inline TBool TDesC16::operator<=(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
  1.1405 +/**
  1.1406 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is less than or equal
  1.1407 +to the specified descriptor's data.
  1.1408 +
  1.1409 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
  1.1410 +
  1.1411 +@param aDes The 16-bit non- modifiable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
  1.1412 +            with this descriptor's data. 
  1.1413 +
  1.1414 +@return True if less than or equal, false otherwise. 
  1.1415 +
  1.1416 +@see TDesC16::Compare
  1.1417 +*/
  1.1418 +	{return(Compare(aDes)<=0);}
  1.1419 +
  1.1420 +
  1.1421 +
  1.1422 +
  1.1423 +inline TBool TDesC16::operator>(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
  1.1424 +/**
  1.1425 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is greater than the specified
  1.1426 +descriptor's data.
  1.1427 +
  1.1428 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
  1.1429 +
  1.1430 +@param aDes The 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
  1.1431 +            with this descriptor's data. 
  1.1432 +
  1.1433 +@return True if greater than, false otherwise. 
  1.1434 +
  1.1435 +@see TDesC16::Compare
  1.1436 +*/
  1.1437 +	{return(Compare(aDes)>0);}
  1.1438 +
  1.1439 +
  1.1440 +
  1.1441 +
  1.1442 +inline TBool TDesC16::operator>=(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
  1.1443 +/**
  1.1444 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is greater than or equal to the
  1.1445 +specified descriptor's data.
  1.1446 +
  1.1447 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
  1.1448 +
  1.1449 +@param aDes The 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
  1.1450 +            with this descriptor's data. 
  1.1451 +
  1.1452 +@return True if greater than or equal, false otherwise. 
  1.1453 +
  1.1454 +@see TDesC16::Compare
  1.1455 +*/
  1.1456 +	{return(Compare(aDes)>=0);}
  1.1457 +
  1.1458 +
  1.1459 +
  1.1460 +
  1.1461 +inline TBool TDesC16::operator==(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
  1.1462 +/**
  1.1463 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is equal to the specified
  1.1464 +descriptor's data.
  1.1465 +
  1.1466 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
  1.1467 +
  1.1468 +@param aDes The 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
  1.1469 +            with this descriptor's data. 
  1.1470 +
  1.1471 +@return True if equal, false otherwise. 
  1.1472 +
  1.1473 +@see TDesC16::Compare
  1.1474 +*/
  1.1475 +	{return(Compare(aDes)==0);}
  1.1476 +
  1.1477 +
  1.1478 +
  1.1479 +
  1.1480 +inline TBool TDesC16::operator!=(const TDesC16 &aDes) const
  1.1481 +/**
  1.1482 +Determines whether this descriptor's data is not equal to the specified
  1.1483 +descriptor's data.
  1.1484 +
  1.1485 +The comparison is implemented using the Compare() member function.
  1.1486 +
  1.1487 +@param aDes The 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be compared 
  1.1488 +            with this descriptor's data. 
  1.1489 +
  1.1490 +@return True if not equal, false otherwise. 
  1.1491 +
  1.1492 +@see TDesC16::Compare
  1.1493 +*/
  1.1494 +	{return(Compare(aDes)!=0);}
  1.1495 +
  1.1496 +
  1.1497 +
  1.1498 +
  1.1499 +inline const TUint16 &TDesC16::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
  1.1500 +/**
  1.1501 +Gets a reference to a single data item within this descriptor's data.
  1.1502 +
  1.1503 +@param anIndex The position of the individual data item within the descriptor's 
  1.1504 +               data. This is an offset value; a zero value refers to the
  1.1505 +			   leftmost data position. 
  1.1506 +
  1.1507 +@return A reference to the data item.
  1.1508 +
  1.1509 +@panic USER 9, if anIndex is negative or greater than or equal to the current
  1.1510 +               length of the descriptor.
  1.1511 +*/
  1.1512 +	{return(AtC(anIndex));}
  1.1513 +
  1.1514 +
  1.1515 +
  1.1516 +
  1.1517 +inline TInt TDesC16::Length() const
  1.1518 +/**
  1.1519 +Gets the length of the data.
  1.1520 +
  1.1521 +This is the number of 16-bit values or data items represented by the descriptor.
  1.1522 +
  1.1523 +@return The length of the data represented by the descriptor.
  1.1524 +*/
  1.1525 +	{return(iLength&KMaskDesLength16);}
  1.1526 +
  1.1527 +
  1.1528 +
  1.1529 +
  1.1530 +inline TInt TDesC16::Size() const
  1.1531 +/**
  1.1532 +Gets the size of the data.
  1.1533 +
  1.1534 +This is the number of bytes occupied by the data represented by the descriptor.
  1.1535 +
  1.1536 +@return The size of the data represented by the descriptor. This is always 
  1.1537 +        twice the length.
  1.1538 + */
  1.1539 +	{return(Length()<<1);}
  1.1540 +
  1.1541 +
  1.1542 +
  1.1543 +
  1.1544 +inline void TDesC16::DoSetLength(TInt aLength)
  1.1545 +	{iLength=(iLength&(~KMaskDesLength16))|aLength;}
  1.1546 +
  1.1547 +
  1.1548 +
  1.1549 +
  1.1550 +// Class TPtrC16
  1.1551 +inline void TPtrC16::Set(const TUint16 *aBuf,TInt aLength)
  1.1552 +/**
  1.1553 +Sets the 16-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor to point to the specified 
  1.1554 +location in memory, whether in RAM or ROM.
  1.1555 +
  1.1556 +The length of the descriptor is set to the specified length.
  1.1557 +
  1.1558 +@param aBuf    A pointer to the location that the descriptor is to represent.
  1.1559 +@param aLength The length of the descriptor. This value must be non-negative 
  1.1560 +
  1.1561 +@panic USER 17, if aLength is negative.
  1.1562 +*/
  1.1563 +	{new(this) TPtrC16(aBuf,aLength);}
  1.1564 +
  1.1565 +
  1.1566 +
  1.1567 +
  1.1568 +inline void TPtrC16::Set(const TDesC16 &aDes)
  1.1569 +/**
  1.1570 +Sets the 16-bit non-modifiable pointer descriptor from the specified descriptor.
  1.1571 +
  1.1572 +It is set to point to the same data and is given the same length.
  1.1573 +
  1.1574 +@param aDes A reference to a 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor
  1.1575 +*/
  1.1576 +	{new(this) TPtrC16(aDes);}
  1.1577 +
  1.1578 +
  1.1579 +
  1.1580 +
  1.1581 +inline void TPtrC16::Set(const TPtrC16& aPtr)
  1.1582 +	{new(this) TPtrC16(aPtr);}
  1.1583 +
  1.1584 +
  1.1585 +
  1.1586 +
  1.1587 +// class TBufCBase16
  1.1588 +inline TPtr16 TBufCBase16::DoDes(TInt aMaxLength)
  1.1589 +	{return TPtr16(*this,aMaxLength);}
  1.1590 +
  1.1591 +
  1.1592 +
  1.1593 +
  1.1594 +// Template class TBufC16
  1.1595 +template <TInt S>
  1.1596 +inline TBufC16<S>::TBufC16()
  1.1597 +	: TBufCBase16()
  1.1598 +/**
  1.1599 +Constructs an empty 16-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor. 
  1.1600 +
  1.1601 +It contains no data.
  1.1602 +
  1.1603 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which 
  1.1604 +is created as part of the buffer descriptor object.
  1.1605 +
  1.1606 +Data can, subsequently, be assigned into this buffer descriptor using the 
  1.1607 +assignment operators.
  1.1608 +
  1.1609 +@see TBufC16::operator=
  1.1610 +*/
  1.1611 +	{}
  1.1612 +
  1.1613 +
  1.1614 +
  1.1615 +
  1.1616 +template <TInt S>
  1.1617 +inline TBufC16<S>::TBufC16(const TUint16 *aString)
  1.1618 +	: TBufCBase16(aString,S)
  1.1619 +/** 
  1.1620 +Constructs the 16-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor from a zero terminated
  1.1621 +string.
  1.1622 +
  1.1623 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which 
  1.1624 +is created as part of this object.
  1.1625 +
  1.1626 +The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer descriptor's 
  1.1627 +data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the 
  1.1628 +string, excluding the zero terminator.
  1.1629 +
  1.1630 +@panic USER 8, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
  1.1631 +               greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
  1.1632 +
  1.1633 +@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
  1.1634 +*/
  1.1635 +	{}
  1.1636 +
  1.1637 +
  1.1638 +
  1.1639 +
  1.1640 +template <TInt S>
  1.1641 +inline TBufC16<S>::TBufC16(const TDesC16 &aDes)
  1.1642 +	: TBufCBase16(aDes,S)
  1.1643 +/**
  1.1644 +Constructs the 16-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor from any
  1.1645 +existing descriptor.
  1.1646 +
  1.1647 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which 
  1.1648 +is created as part of this object.
  1.1649 +
  1.1650 +Data is copied from the source descriptor into this buffer descriptor and 
  1.1651 +the length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the
  1.1652 +source descriptor.
  1.1653 +
  1.1654 +@param aDes The source 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.1655 +
  1.1656 +@panic USER 8, if the length of the source descriptor is
  1.1657 +               greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
  1.1658 +*/
  1.1659 +	{}
  1.1660 +
  1.1661 +
  1.1662 +
  1.1663 +
  1.1664 +template <TInt S>
  1.1665 +inline TBufC16<S> &TBufC16<S>::operator=(const TUint16 *aString)
  1.1666 +/**
  1.1667 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
  1.1668 +
  1.1669 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1670 +
  1.1671 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
  1.1672 +
  1.1673 +@return A reference to this descriptor.
  1.1674 +
  1.1675 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
  1.1676 +                greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.1677 +*/
  1.1678 +	{Copy(aString,S);return(*this);}
  1.1679 +
  1.1680 +
  1.1681 +
  1.1682 +
  1.1683 +template <TInt S>
  1.1684 +inline TBufC16<S> &TBufC16<S>::operator=(const TDesC16 &aDes)
  1.1685 +/**
  1.1686 +Copies data into this descriptor, replacing any existing data.
  1.1687 +
  1.1688 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1689 +
  1.1690 +@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.1691 +
  1.1692 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is
  1.1693 +                greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.1694 +
  1.1695 +@return A reference to this descriptor.
  1.1696 +*/
  1.1697 +	{Copy(aDes,S);return(*this);}
  1.1698 +
  1.1699 +
  1.1700 +
  1.1701 +
  1.1702 +template <TInt S>
  1.1703 +inline TPtr16 TBufC16<S>::Des()
  1.1704 +/**
  1.1705 +Creates and returns a 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor for the data
  1.1706 +represented by this 16-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.1707 +
  1.1708 +The content of a non-modifiable buffer descriptor normally cannot be altered, 
  1.1709 +other than by complete replacement of the data. Creating a modifiable pointer 
  1.1710 +descriptor provides a way of changing the data.
  1.1711 +
  1.1712 +The modifiable pointer descriptor is set to point to this non-modifiable buffer 
  1.1713 +descriptor's data.
  1.1714 +
  1.1715 +The length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the length of this 
  1.1716 +non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.1717 +
  1.1718 +The maximum length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the value 
  1.1719 +of the integer template parameter.
  1.1720 +
  1.1721 +When data is modified through this new pointer descriptor, the lengths of 
  1.1722 +both it and this constant buffer descriptor are changed.
  1.1723 +
  1.1724 +@return A 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor representing the data in this 
  1.1725 +        16-bit non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.1726 +*/
  1.1727 +	{return(DoDes(S));}
  1.1728 +
  1.1729 +
  1.1730 +
  1.1731 +
  1.1732 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.1733 +// Class HBufC16
  1.1734 +inline HBufC16 &HBufC16::operator=(const HBufC16 &aLcb)
  1.1735 +/**
  1.1736 +Copies data into this 16-bit heap descriptor replacing any existing data.
  1.1737 +
  1.1738 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1739 +
  1.1740 +Note that the maximum length of this (target) descriptor is the length
  1.1741 +of the descriptor buffer in the allocated host heap cell; this may be greater
  1.1742 +than the maximum length specified when this descriptor was created or
  1.1743 +last re-allocated.
  1.1744 +
  1.1745 +@param aLcb The source 16-bit heap descriptor.
  1.1746 +
  1.1747 +@return A reference to this 16-bit heap descriptor.
  1.1748 +
  1.1749 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aLcb is greater than the
  1.1750 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor
  1.1751 +*/
  1.1752 +	{return *this=static_cast<const TDesC16&>(aLcb);}
  1.1753 +#endif
  1.1754 +
  1.1755 +
  1.1756 +
  1.1757 +
  1.1758 +// Class TDes16
  1.1759 +inline TDes16 &TDes16::operator=(const TUint16 *aString)
  1.1760 +/**
  1.1761 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
  1.1762 +
  1.1763 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1764 +
  1.1765 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
  1.1766 +
  1.1767 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
  1.1768 +
  1.1769 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
  1.1770 +                greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.1771 +*/
  1.1772 +    {Copy(aString);return(*this);}
  1.1773 +
  1.1774 +
  1.1775 +
  1.1776 +
  1.1777 +inline TDes16 &TDes16::operator=(const TDesC16 &aDes)
  1.1778 +/**
  1.1779 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
  1.1780 +
  1.1781 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1782 +
  1.1783 +@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.1784 +
  1.1785 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
  1.1786 +
  1.1787 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
  1.1788 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.1789 +*/
  1.1790 +    {Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.1791 +
  1.1792 +
  1.1793 +
  1.1794 +
  1.1795 +inline TDes16 &TDes16::operator=(const TDes16 &aDes)
  1.1796 +/**
  1.1797 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
  1.1798 +
  1.1799 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1800 +
  1.1801 +@param aDes A 16-bit modifiable descriptor.
  1.1802 +
  1.1803 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
  1.1804 +
  1.1805 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
  1.1806 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.1807 +*/
  1.1808 +    {Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.1809 +
  1.1810 +
  1.1811 +
  1.1812 +
  1.1813 +inline TDes16 &TDes16::operator+=(const TDesC16 &aDes)
  1.1814 +/** 
  1.1815 +Appends data onto the end of this descriptor's data and returns a reference 
  1.1816 +to this descriptor.
  1.1817 +
  1.1818 +The length of this descriptor is incremented to reflect the new content.
  1.1819 +
  1.1820 +@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be appended. 
  1.1821 +
  1.1822 +@return A reference to this descriptor.
  1.1823 +
  1.1824 +@panic USER 11, if the resulting length of this descriptor is greater than its
  1.1825 +                maximum length.  
  1.1826 +*/
  1.1827 +	{Append(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.1828 +
  1.1829 +
  1.1830 +
  1.1831 +
  1.1832 +inline const TUint16 &TDes16::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
  1.1833 +/**
  1.1834 +Gets a const reference to a single data item within this descriptor's data.
  1.1835 +
  1.1836 +@param anIndex The position the data item within this descriptor's data. This 
  1.1837 +is an offset value; a zero value refers to the leftmost data position.
  1.1838 +
  1.1839 +@return A const reference to the data item at the specified position.
  1.1840 +
  1.1841 +@panic USER 9, if anIndex is negative or is greater than or equal to the
  1.1842 +                current length of this descriptor.
  1.1843 +*/
  1.1844 +	{return(AtC(anIndex));}
  1.1845 +
  1.1846 +
  1.1847 +
  1.1848 +
  1.1849 +inline TUint16 &TDes16::operator[](TInt anIndex)
  1.1850 +/** 
  1.1851 +Gets a non-const reference to a single data item within this descriptor's 
  1.1852 +data.
  1.1853 +
  1.1854 +@param anIndex The position of the data item within this descriptor's data.
  1.1855 +               This is an offset value; a zero value refers to the leftmost
  1.1856 +			   data position. 
  1.1857 +			   
  1.1858 +@return A non-const reference to the data item at the specified position.
  1.1859 +
  1.1860 +@panic USER 9, if anIndex is negative or is greater than or equal to the
  1.1861 +                current length of this descriptor.
  1.1862 +*/
  1.1863 +	{return((TUint16 &)AtC(anIndex));}
  1.1864 +
  1.1865 +
  1.1866 +
  1.1867 +
  1.1868 +inline TInt TDes16::MaxLength() const
  1.1869 +/**
  1.1870 +Gets the maximum length of the descriptor.
  1.1871 +
  1.1872 +This is the upper limit for the number of 16-bit values or data items that
  1.1873 +the descriptor can represent.
  1.1874 +
  1.1875 +@return The maximum length of data that the descriptor can represent.
  1.1876 +*/
  1.1877 +	{return(iMaxLength);}
  1.1878 +
  1.1879 +
  1.1880 +
  1.1881 +
  1.1882 +inline TInt TDes16::MaxSize() const
  1.1883 +/**
  1.1884 +Gets the maximum size of the descriptor.
  1.1885 +
  1.1886 +This is the upper limit for the number of bytes which the data represented by
  1.1887 +the descriptor can occupy.
  1.1888 +
  1.1889 +@return The maximum size of the descriptor data.
  1.1890 +*/
  1.1891 +	{return(iMaxLength<<1);}
  1.1892 +
  1.1893 +
  1.1894 +
  1.1895 +
  1.1896 +inline TUint16 * TDes16::WPtr() const
  1.1897 +	{return((TUint16 *)Ptr());}
  1.1898 +
  1.1899 +
  1.1900 +
  1.1901 +
  1.1902 +// Class TPtr16
  1.1903 +inline TPtr16 &TPtr16::operator=(const TUint16 *aString)
  1.1904 +/**
  1.1905 +Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing
  1.1906 +any existing data.
  1.1907 +
  1.1908 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1909 +
  1.1910 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
  1.1911 +
  1.1912 +@return A reference to this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
  1.1913 +
  1.1914 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
  1.1915 +                greater than the maximum length of this descriptor.
  1.1916 +*/
  1.1917 +	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
  1.1918 +
  1.1919 +
  1.1920 +
  1.1921 +
  1.1922 +inline TPtr16 &TPtr16::operator=(const TDesC16 &aDes)
  1.1923 +/**
  1.1924 +Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing any
  1.1925 +existing data.
  1.1926 +
  1.1927 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1928 +
  1.1929 +@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor whose data is to be copied 
  1.1930 +            into this descriptor.
  1.1931 +
  1.1932 +@return A reference to this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
  1.1933 +
  1.1934 +@panic USER 11, if the length of aDes is greater than the maximum 
  1.1935 +                length of this descriptor.
  1.1936 +*/
  1.1937 +	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.1938 +
  1.1939 +
  1.1940 +
  1.1941 +
  1.1942 +inline TPtr16 &TPtr16::operator=(const TPtr16 &aDes)
  1.1943 +/**
  1.1944 +Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor replacing any
  1.1945 +existing data.
  1.1946 +
  1.1947 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.1948 +
  1.1949 +@param aDes A 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor whose data is to be copied 
  1.1950 +            into this descriptor.
  1.1951 +
  1.1952 +@return A reference to this 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
  1.1953 +
  1.1954 +@panic USER 11, if the length of aDes is greater than the maximum 
  1.1955 +                length of this descriptor.
  1.1956 +*/
  1.1957 +	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.1958 +
  1.1959 +
  1.1960 +
  1.1961 +
  1.1962 +inline void TPtr16::Set(TUint16 *aBuf,TInt aLength,TInt aMaxLength)
  1.1963 +/**
  1.1964 +Sets the 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor to point to the specified location 
  1.1965 +in memory, whether in RAM or ROM.
  1.1966 +
  1.1967 +The length of the descriptor and its maximum length are set to the specified
  1.1968 +values.
  1.1969 +
  1.1970 +@param aBuf       A pointer to the location that the descriptor is to represent.
  1.1971 +@param aLength    The length of the descriptor.
  1.1972 +@param aMaxLength The maximum length of the descriptor.
  1.1973 +
  1.1974 +@panic USER 8,  if aLength is negative or is greater than the maximum length of
  1.1975 +                this descriptor.
  1.1976 +@panic USER 18, if aMaxLength is negative.
  1.1977 +*/
  1.1978 +	{new(this) TPtr16(aBuf,aLength,aMaxLength);}
  1.1979 +
  1.1980 +
  1.1981 +
  1.1982 +
  1.1983 +inline void TPtr16::Set(const TPtr16 &aPtr)
  1.1984 +/**
  1.1985 +Sets the 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor from an existing
  1.1986 +16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
  1.1987 +  
  1.1988 +It is set to point to the same data, is given the same length and the same
  1.1989 +maximum length as the source pointer descriptor.
  1.1990 +
  1.1991 +@param aPtr The source 16-bit modifiable pointer descriptor.
  1.1992 +*/
  1.1993 +	{new(this) TPtr16(aPtr);}
  1.1994 +
  1.1995 +
  1.1996 +
  1.1997 +
  1.1998 +// Template class TBuf16
  1.1999 +template <TInt S>
  1.2000 +inline TBuf16<S>::TBuf16()
  1.2001 +	: TBufBase16(S)
  1.2002 +/**
  1.2003 +Constructs an empty 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.2004 +
  1.2005 +It contains no data.
  1.2006 +
  1.2007 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created 
  1.2008 +as part of the object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.2009 +*/
  1.2010 +	{}
  1.2011 +
  1.2012 +
  1.2013 +
  1.2014 +
  1.2015 +template <TInt S>
  1.2016 +inline TBuf16<S>::TBuf16(TInt aLength)
  1.2017 +	: TBufBase16(aLength,S)
  1.2018 +/**
  1.2019 +Constructs an empty 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor and sets the its length 
  1.2020 +to the specified value.
  1.2021 +
  1.2022 +No data is assigned to the descriptor.
  1.2023 +
  1.2024 +The integer template parameter defines the size of the data area created as 
  1.2025 +part of the object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.2026 +
  1.2027 +@param aLength The length of this modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.2028 +
  1.2029 +@panic USER 8, if aLength is negative or is greater than the 
  1.2030 +                value of the integer template parameter.
  1.2031 +*/
  1.2032 +	{}
  1.2033 +
  1.2034 +
  1.2035 +
  1.2036 +
  1.2037 +template <TInt S>
  1.2038 +inline TBuf16<S>::TBuf16(const TUint16 *aString)
  1.2039 +	: TBufBase16(aString,S)
  1.2040 +/**
  1.2041 +Constructs the 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from
  1.2042 +a zero terminated string.
  1.2043 +
  1.2044 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is
  1.2045 +created as part of this object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.2046 +
  1.2047 +The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer
  1.2048 +descriptor's data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the
  1.2049 +length of the string, excluding the zero terminator.
  1.2050 +
  1.2051 +@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
  1.2052 +
  1.2053 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
  1.2054 +                is greater than the value of the integer template parameter.
  1.2055 +*/
  1.2056 +	{}
  1.2057 +
  1.2058 +
  1.2059 +
  1.2060 +
  1.2061 +template <TInt S>
  1.2062 +inline TBuf16<S>::TBuf16(const TDesC16 &aDes)
  1.2063 +	: TBufBase16(aDes,S)
  1.2064 +/**
  1.2065 +Constructs the 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor from any existing
  1.2066 +16-bit descriptor.
  1.2067 +
  1.2068 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created 
  1.2069 +as part of this object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.2070 +
  1.2071 +Data is copied from the source descriptor into this modifiable buffer descriptor 
  1.2072 +and the length of this modifiable buffer descriptor is set to the length of 
  1.2073 +the source descriptor.
  1.2074 +
  1.2075 +@param aDes The source 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.2076 +
  1.2077 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the source descriptor is greater than the
  1.2078 +                value of the integer template parameter.
  1.2079 +*/
  1.2080 +	{}
  1.2081 +
  1.2082 +
  1.2083 +
  1.2084 +
  1.2085 +template <TInt S>
  1.2086 +inline TBuf16<S> &TBuf16<S>::operator=(const TUint16 *aString)
  1.2087 +/**
  1.2088 +Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any
  1.2089 +existing data. 
  1.2090 +
  1.2091 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.2092 +
  1.2093 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
  1.2094 +
  1.2095 +@return A reference to this descriptor.
  1.2096 +
  1.2097 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
  1.2098 +                is greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.2099 +*/
  1.2100 +	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
  1.2101 +
  1.2102 +
  1.2103 +
  1.2104 +
  1.2105 +template <TInt S>
  1.2106 +inline TBuf16<S> &TBuf16<S>::operator=(const TDesC16 &aDes)
  1.2107 +/**
  1.2108 +Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable descriptor, replacing any
  1.2109 +existing data.
  1.2110 +
  1.2111 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.2112 +
  1.2113 +@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.2114 +
  1.2115 +@return A reference to this descriptor.
  1.2116 +
  1.2117 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
  1.2118 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.2119 +*/
  1.2120 +	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.2121 +
  1.2122 +
  1.2123 +
  1.2124 +
  1.2125 +template <TInt S>
  1.2126 +inline TBuf16<S>& TBuf16<S>::operator=(const TBuf16<S>& aBuf)
  1.2127 +/**
  1.2128 +Copies data into this 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor replacing any
  1.2129 +existing data.
  1.2130 +
  1.2131 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.2132 +
  1.2133 +@param aBuf The source 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor with the same
  1.2134 +            template value.
  1.2135 +
  1.2136 +@return A reference to this 16-bit modifiable buffer descriptor. 
  1.2137 +
  1.2138 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
  1.2139 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.2140 +*/
  1.2141 +	{Copy(aBuf);return *this;}
  1.2142 +
  1.2143 +
  1.2144 +// Class RBuf16
  1.2145 +inline RBuf16& RBuf16::operator=(const TUint16* aString)
  1.2146 +/**
  1.2147 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
  1.2148 +
  1.2149 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.2150 +
  1.2151 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
  1.2152 +
  1.2153 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
  1.2154 +
  1.2155 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
  1.2156 +                greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.2157 +*/
  1.2158 +    {Copy(aString);return(*this);}
  1.2159 +
  1.2160 +
  1.2161 +
  1.2162 +
  1.2163 +inline RBuf16& RBuf16::operator=(const TDesC16& aDes)
  1.2164 +/**
  1.2165 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
  1.2166 +
  1.2167 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.2168 +
  1.2169 +@param aDes A 16-bit non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.2170 +
  1.2171 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
  1.2172 +
  1.2173 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
  1.2174 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.2175 +*/
  1.2176 +    {Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.2177 +
  1.2178 +
  1.2179 +
  1.2180 +
  1.2181 +inline RBuf16& RBuf16::operator=(const RBuf16& aDes)
  1.2182 +/**
  1.2183 +Copies data into this descriptor replacing any existing data.
  1.2184 +
  1.2185 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.2186 +
  1.2187 +@param aDes A 16-bit buffer descriptor.
  1.2188 +
  1.2189 +@return A reference to this, the target descriptor.
  1.2190 +
  1.2191 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
  1.2192 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor.
  1.2193 +*/
  1.2194 +    {Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.2195 +
  1.2196 +
  1.2197 +
  1.2198 +
  1.2199 +/**
  1.2200 +Creates a 16-bit resizable buffer descriptor that has been initialised with
  1.2201 +data from the specified read stream; leaves on failure.
  1.2202 +			 
  1.2203 +Data is assigned to the new descriptor from the specified stream.
  1.2204 +This variant assumes that the stream contains the length of the data followed
  1.2205 +by the data itself.
  1.2206 +
  1.2207 +The function is implemented by calling the HBufC16::NewL(RReadStream&amp;,TInt)
  1.2208 +variant and then assigning the resulting heap descriptor using
  1.2209 +the RBuf16::Assign(HBufC16*) variant. The comments that describe
  1.2210 +the HBufC16::NewL() variant	also apply to this RBuf16::CreateL() function.
  1.2211 +
  1.2212 +The function may leave with one of the system-wide error codes,	specifically 
  1.2213 +KErrOverflow, if the length of the data as read from the stream is greater than
  1.2214 +the upper limit as specified by the aMaxLength parameter.
  1.2215 +
  1.2216 +@param aStream    The stream from which the data length and the data to be
  1.2217 +                  assigned to the new descriptor, are taken.
  1.2218 +@param aMaxLength The upper limit on the length of data that the descriptor is
  1.2219 +                  to represent. The value of this parameter must be non-negative
  1.2220 +                  otherwise the	underlying function will panic.
  1.2221 +*/
  1.2222 +inline void RBuf16::CreateL(RReadStream &aStream,TInt aMaxLength)
  1.2223 +	{
  1.2224 +	Assign(HBufC16::NewL(aStream,aMaxLength));
  1.2225 +	}
  1.2226 +
  1.2227 +
  1.2228 +// Template class TLitC16
  1.2229 +template <TInt S>
  1.2230 +inline const TDesC16* TLitC16<S>::operator&() const
  1.2231 +/**
  1.2232 +Returns a const TDesC16 type pointer.
  1.2233 +
  1.2234 +@return A descriptor type pointer to this literal. 
  1.2235 +*/
  1.2236 +	{return REINTERPRET_CAST(const TDesC16*,this);}
  1.2237 +
  1.2238 +
  1.2239 +
  1.2240 +
  1.2241 +template <TInt S>
  1.2242 +inline const TDesC16& TLitC16<S>::operator()() const
  1.2243 +/**
  1.2244 +Returns a const TDesC16 type reference.
  1.2245 +
  1.2246 +@return A descriptor type reference to this literal 
  1.2247 +*/
  1.2248 +	{return *operator&();}
  1.2249 +
  1.2250 +
  1.2251 +
  1.2252 +
  1.2253 +template <TInt S>
  1.2254 +inline TLitC16<S>::operator const TDesC16&() const
  1.2255 +/**
  1.2256 +Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC16<TInt> type is passed to a function
  1.2257 +which is prototyped to take a const TDesC16& type.
  1.2258 +*/
  1.2259 +	{return *operator&();}
  1.2260 +
  1.2261 +
  1.2262 +
  1.2263 +
  1.2264 +template <TInt S>
  1.2265 +inline TLitC16<S>::operator const __TRefDesC16() const
  1.2266 +/**
  1.2267 +Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC16<TInt> type is passed to a function
  1.2268 +which is prototyped to take a const TRefByValue<const TDesC16> type.
  1.2269 +
  1.2270 +@see __TRefDesC16
  1.2271 +*/
  1.2272 +	{return *operator&();}
  1.2273 +#endif //__KERNEL_MODE__
  1.2274 +
  1.2275 +
  1.2276 +
  1.2277 +
  1.2278 +// Template class TBufC
  1.2279 +#if defined(_UNICODE) && !defined(__KERNEL_MODE__)
  1.2280 +template <TInt S>
  1.2281 +inline TBufC<S>::TBufC()
  1.2282 +	: TBufCBase16()
  1.2283 +/**
  1.2284 +Constructs an empty build independent non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.2285 +
  1.2286 +It contains no data.
  1.2287 +
  1.2288 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which 
  1.2289 +is created as part of the buffer descriptor object.
  1.2290 +
  1.2291 +Data can, subsequently, be assigned into this buffer descriptor using the 
  1.2292 +assignment operators.
  1.2293 +
  1.2294 +@see TBufC::operator=
  1.2295 +*/
  1.2296 +	{}
  1.2297 +
  1.2298 +
  1.2299 +
  1.2300 +
  1.2301 +template <TInt S>
  1.2302 +inline TBufC<S>::TBufC(const TText *aString)
  1.2303 +	: TBufCBase16(aString,S)
  1.2304 +/** 
  1.2305 +Constructs a build independent non-modifiable 
  1.2306 +buffer descriptor from a zero terminated string.
  1.2307 +
  1.2308 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which 
  1.2309 +is created as part of this object.
  1.2310 +
  1.2311 +The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer descriptor's 
  1.2312 +data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the 
  1.2313 +string, excluding the zero terminator.
  1.2314 +
  1.2315 +@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
  1.2316 +
  1.2317 +@panic USER 8,  if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
  1.2318 +                greater than the value of the integer template parameter for
  1.2319 +				the 16-bit build variant.
  1.2320 +
  1.2321 +@panic USER 20, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator, is
  1.2322 +                greater than the value of the integer template parameter for
  1.2323 +				the 8-bit build variant.
  1.2324 +*/
  1.2325 +	{}
  1.2326 +
  1.2327 +
  1.2328 +
  1.2329 +
  1.2330 +template <TInt S>
  1.2331 +inline TBufC<S>::TBufC(const TDesC &aDes)
  1.2332 +	: TBufCBase16(aDes,S)
  1.2333 +/**
  1.2334 +Constructs a build-independent non-modifiable buffer descriptor from any 
  1.2335 +existing build independent descriptor.
  1.2336 +
  1.2337 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which 
  1.2338 +is created as part of this object.
  1.2339 +
  1.2340 +Data is copied from the source descriptor into this buffer descriptor and 
  1.2341 +the length of this buffer descriptor is set to the length of the source descriptor.
  1.2342 +
  1.2343 +The length of the source descriptor must not be greater than the value of 
  1.2344 +the integer template parameter, otherwise the constructor raises a USER 20 
  1.2345 +panic for an 8 bit build variant or a USER 8 panic for a 16 bit (Unicode) 
  1.2346 +build variant.
  1.2347 +
  1.2348 +@param aDes The source build independent non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.2349 +
  1.2350 +@panic USER 8,  if the length of the source descriptor is
  1.2351 +                greater than the value of the integer template parameter for
  1.2352 +				the 16-bit build variant.
  1.2353 +
  1.2354 +@panic USER 20, if the length of the source descriptor is
  1.2355 +                greater than the value of the integer template parameter for
  1.2356 +				the 8-bit build variant.
  1.2357 +*/
  1.2358 +	{}
  1.2359 +#else
  1.2360 +template <TInt S>
  1.2361 +inline TBufC<S>::TBufC()
  1.2362 +	: TBufCBase8()
  1.2363 +	{}
  1.2364 +template <TInt S>
  1.2365 +inline TBufC<S>::TBufC(const TText *aString)
  1.2366 +	: TBufCBase8(aString,S)
  1.2367 +	{}
  1.2368 +template <TInt S>
  1.2369 +inline TBufC<S>::TBufC(const TDesC &aDes)
  1.2370 +	: TBufCBase8(aDes,S)
  1.2371 +	{}
  1.2372 +#endif
  1.2373 +template <TInt S>
  1.2374 +inline TBufC<S> &TBufC<S>::operator=(const TText *aString)
  1.2375 +/** 
  1.2376 +Copies data into this descriptor, replacing any existing data.
  1.2377 +
  1.2378 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.2379 +
  1.2380 +@param aString A pointer to a zero-terminated string.
  1.2381 +
  1.2382 +@return A reference to this descriptor.
  1.2383 +
  1.2384 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
  1.2385 +                is greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor
  1.2386 +				for the 16-bit build variant.
  1.2387 +
  1.2388 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
  1.2389 +                is greater than the maximum length of this (target) descriptor
  1.2390 +				for the 8-bit build variant.
  1.2391 +*/
  1.2392 +	{Copy(aString,S);return(*this);}
  1.2393 +
  1.2394 +
  1.2395 +
  1.2396 +
  1.2397 +template <TInt S>
  1.2398 +inline TBufC<S> &TBufC<S>::operator=(const TDesC &aDes)
  1.2399 +/**
  1.2400 +Copies data into this descriptor, replacing any existing data.
  1.2401 +
  1.2402 +The length of this descriptor is set to reflect the new data.
  1.2403 +
  1.2404 +@param aDes A build independent non-modifiable descriptor. 
  1.2405 +
  1.2406 +@return A reference to this descriptor.
  1.2407 +
  1.2408 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
  1.2409 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor for the 16-bit
  1.2410 +				build variant.
  1.2411 +
  1.2412 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the descriptor aDes is greater than the
  1.2413 +                maximum length of this (target) descriptor for the 8-bit
  1.2414 +				build variant.
  1.2415 +*/
  1.2416 +	{Copy(aDes,S);return(*this);}
  1.2417 +
  1.2418 +
  1.2419 +
  1.2420 +
  1.2421 +template <TInt S>
  1.2422 +inline TPtr TBufC<S>::Des()
  1.2423 +/**
  1.2424 +Creates and returns a build-independent modifiable pointer descriptor for
  1.2425 +the data represented by this build-independent non-modifiable buffer
  1.2426 +descriptor.
  1.2427 +
  1.2428 +The content of a non-modifiable buffer descriptor normally cannot be altered, 
  1.2429 +other than by complete replacement of the data. Creating a modifiable pointer 
  1.2430 +descriptor provides a way of changing the data.
  1.2431 +
  1.2432 +The modifiable pointer descriptor is set to point to this non-modifiable buffer 
  1.2433 +descriptor's data.
  1.2434 +
  1.2435 +The length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the length of this 
  1.2436 +non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.2437 +
  1.2438 +The maximum length of the modifiable pointer descriptor is set to the value 
  1.2439 +of the integer template parameter.
  1.2440 +
  1.2441 +When data is modified through this new pointer descriptor, the lengths of 
  1.2442 +both it and this constant buffer descriptor are changed.
  1.2443 +
  1.2444 +@return A build independent modifiable pointer descriptor representing the 
  1.2445 +        data in this build independent non-modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.2446 +*/
  1.2447 +	{return(DoDes(S));}
  1.2448 +
  1.2449 +
  1.2450 +
  1.2451 +
  1.2452 +// Template class TBuf
  1.2453 +#if defined(_UNICODE) && !defined(__KERNEL_MODE__)
  1.2454 +template <TInt S>
  1.2455 +inline TBuf<S>::TBuf()
  1.2456 +	: TBufBase16(S)
  1.2457 +/**
  1.2458 +Creates a build-independent modifiable buffer descriptor which 
  1.2459 +contains no data.
  1.2460 +
  1.2461 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area that is created 
  1.2462 +as part of the object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.2463 +*/
  1.2464 +	{}
  1.2465 +
  1.2466 +
  1.2467 +
  1.2468 +
  1.2469 +template <TInt S>
  1.2470 +inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(TInt aLength)
  1.2471 +	: TBufBase16(aLength,S)
  1.2472 +/**
  1.2473 +Constructs an empty build independent modifiable buffer descriptor and
  1.2474 +sets its length to the specified value.
  1.2475 +
  1.2476 +No data is assigned to the descriptor.
  1.2477 +
  1.2478 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created 
  1.2479 +as part of the object and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.2480 +
  1.2481 +@param aLength The length of this modifiable buffer descriptor.
  1.2482 +
  1.2483 +@panic USER 8,  if aLength is negative and is greater than the value of the
  1.2484 +                integer template parameter for a 16-bit build variant.
  1.2485 +
  1.2486 +@panic USER 20, if aLength is negative and is greater than the value of the
  1.2487 +                integer template parameter for a 8-bit build variant.
  1.2488 +*/
  1.2489 +	{}
  1.2490 +
  1.2491 +
  1.2492 +
  1.2493 +
  1.2494 +template <TInt S>
  1.2495 +inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(const TText *aString)
  1.2496 +	: TBufBase16(aString,S)
  1.2497 +/**
  1.2498 +Constructs the build-independent modifiable buffer descriptor from
  1.2499 +a zero terminated string.
  1.2500 +
  1.2501 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area which 
  1.2502 +is created as part of this object.
  1.2503 +
  1.2504 +The string, excluding the zero terminator, is copied into this buffer
  1.2505 +descriptor's data area. The length of this buffer descriptor is set to
  1.2506 +the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator.
  1.2507 +
  1.2508 +@param aString A pointer to a zero terminated string.
  1.2509 +
  1.2510 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
  1.2511 +                is greater than the value of the integer template parameter
  1.2512 +				for a 16-bit build variant.
  1.2513 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the string, excluding the zero terminator,
  1.2514 +                is greater than the value of the integer template parameter
  1.2515 +				for a 8-bit build variant.
  1.2516 +*/
  1.2517 +	{}
  1.2518 +
  1.2519 +
  1.2520 +
  1.2521 +
  1.2522 +template <TInt S>
  1.2523 +inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(const TDesC &aDes)
  1.2524 +	: TBufBase16(aDes,S)
  1.2525 +/**
  1.2526 +Constructs the build-independent modifiable buffer descriptor from any
  1.2527 +existing build-independent descriptor.
  1.2528 +
  1.2529 +The integer template parameter determines the size of the data area created 
  1.2530 +as part of this object, and defines the descriptor's maximum length.
  1.2531 +
  1.2532 +Data is copied from the source descriptor into this modifiable buffer descriptor 
  1.2533 +and the length of this modifiable buffer descriptor is set to the length of 
  1.2534 +the source descriptor.
  1.2535 +
  1.2536 +@param aDes The source build independent non-modifiable descriptor.
  1.2537 +
  1.2538 +@panic USER 11, if the length of the source descriptor is greater than the
  1.2539 +                value of the integer template parameter for a 16-bit
  1.2540 +				build variant.
  1.2541 +@panic USER 23, if the length of the source descriptor is greater than the
  1.2542 +                value of the integer template parameter for an 8-bit
  1.2543 +				build variant.
  1.2544 +	
  1.2545 +*/
  1.2546 +	{}
  1.2547 +#else
  1.2548 +template <TInt S>
  1.2549 +inline TBuf<S>::TBuf()
  1.2550 +	: TBufBase8(S)
  1.2551 +	{}
  1.2552 +template <TInt S>
  1.2553 +inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(TInt aLength)
  1.2554 +	: TBufBase8(aLength,S)
  1.2555 +	{}
  1.2556 +template <TInt S>
  1.2557 +inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(const TText *aString)
  1.2558 +	: TBufBase8(aString,S)
  1.2559 +	{}
  1.2560 +template <TInt S>
  1.2561 +inline TBuf<S>::TBuf(const TDesC &aDes)
  1.2562 +	: TBufBase8(aDes,S)
  1.2563 +	{}
  1.2564 +#endif
  1.2565 +template <TInt S>
  1.2566 +inline TBuf<S> &TBuf<S>::operator=(const TText *aString)
  1.2567 +	{Copy(aString);return(*this);}
  1.2568 +template <TInt S>
  1.2569 +inline TBuf<S> &TBuf<S>::operator=(const TDesC &aDes)
  1.2570 +	{Copy(aDes);return(*this);}
  1.2571 +template <TInt S>
  1.2572 +inline TBuf<S> &TBuf<S>::operator=(const TBuf<S> &aBuf)
  1.2573 +	{Copy(aBuf);return(*this);}
  1.2574 +
  1.2575 +
  1.2576 +
  1.2577 +
  1.2578 +// Template class TLitC
  1.2579 +template <TInt S>
  1.2580 +inline const TDesC* TLitC<S>::operator&() const
  1.2581 +/**
  1.2582 +Returns a const TDesC type pointer.
  1.2583 +
  1.2584 +@return A descriptor type pointer to this literal. 
  1.2585 +*/
  1.2586 +	{return REINTERPRET_CAST(const TDesC*,this);}
  1.2587 +
  1.2588 +
  1.2589 +
  1.2590 +
  1.2591 +template <TInt S>
  1.2592 +inline const TDesC& TLitC<S>::operator()() const
  1.2593 +/**
  1.2594 +Returns a const TDesC type reference.
  1.2595 +
  1.2596 +@return A descriptor type reference to this literal 
  1.2597 +*/
  1.2598 +	{return *operator&();}
  1.2599 +
  1.2600 +
  1.2601 +
  1.2602 +
  1.2603 +template <TInt S>
  1.2604 +inline TLitC<S>::operator const TDesC&() const
  1.2605 +/**
  1.2606 +Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC<TInt> type is passed to a function
  1.2607 +which is prototyped to take a const TDesC& type.
  1.2608 +*/
  1.2609 +	{return *operator&();}
  1.2610 +
  1.2611 +
  1.2612 +
  1.2613 +
  1.2614 +template <TInt S>
  1.2615 +inline TLitC<S>::operator const __TRefDesC() const
  1.2616 +/**
  1.2617 +Invoked by the compiler when a TLitC<TInt> type is passed to a function
  1.2618 +which is prototyped to take a const TRefByValue<const TDesC> type.
  1.2619 +
  1.2620 +@see __TRefDesC.
  1.2621 +*/
  1.2622 +	{return *operator&();}
  1.2623 +
  1.2624 +
  1.2625 +
  1.2626 +
  1.2627 +// Template class TPckgC
  1.2628 +template <class T>
  1.2629 +inline TPckgC<T>::TPckgC(const T &aRef)
  1.2630 +	: TPtrC8((const TUint8 *)&aRef,sizeof(T))
  1.2631 +/**
  1.2632 +Constructs a packaged non-modifiable pointer descriptor to represent
  1.2633 +the specified object whose type is defined by the template parameter.
  1.2634 +
  1.2635 +@param aRef The object to be represented by this packaged non-modifiable 
  1.2636 +            pointer descriptor.
  1.2637 +*/
  1.2638 +	{}
  1.2639 +
  1.2640 +
  1.2641 +
  1.2642 +
  1.2643 +template <class T>
  1.2644 +inline const T &TPckgC<T>::operator()() const
  1.2645 +/**
  1.2646 +Gets a reference to the object represented by this packaged non-modifiable
  1.2647 +pointer descriptor.
  1.2648 +
  1.2649 +@return The packaged object 
  1.2650 +*/
  1.2651 +	{return(*((const T *)iPtr));}
  1.2652 +
  1.2653 +
  1.2654 +
  1.2655 +
  1.2656 +// Template class TPckg
  1.2657 +template <class T>
  1.2658 +inline TPckg<T>::TPckg(const T &aRef)
  1.2659 +	: TPtr8((TUint8 *)&aRef,sizeof(T),sizeof(T))
  1.2660 +/**
  1.2661 +Constructs a packaged modifiable pointer descriptor to represent the specified 
  1.2662 +object whose type is defined by the template parameter.
  1.2663 +
  1.2664 +@param aRef The object to be represented by this packaged modifiable pointer 
  1.2665 +            descriptor.
  1.2666 +*/
  1.2667 +	{}
  1.2668 +
  1.2669 +
  1.2670 +
  1.2671 +
  1.2672 +template <class T>
  1.2673 +inline T &TPckg<T>::operator()()
  1.2674 +/**
  1.2675 +Gets a reference to the object represented by this packaged
  1.2676 +modifiable pointer descriptor.
  1.2677 +
  1.2678 +@return The packaged object.
  1.2679 +*/
  1.2680 +	{return(*((T *)iPtr));}
  1.2681 +
  1.2682 +
  1.2683 +
  1.2684 +
  1.2685 +// Template class TPckgBuf
  1.2686 +template <class T>
  1.2687 +inline TPckgBuf<T>::TPckgBuf()
  1.2688 +	: TAlignedBuf8<sizeof(T)>(sizeof(T))
  1.2689 +/**
  1.2690 +Constructs a packaged modifiable buffer descriptor for an object whose type 
  1.2691 +is defined by the template parameter.
  1.2692 +
  1.2693 +The length of the packaged descriptor is set to the length of the templated 
  1.2694 +class but no data is assigned into the descriptor.
  1.2695 +*/
  1.2696 +	{new(&this->iBuf[0]) T;}
  1.2697 +
  1.2698 +
  1.2699 +
  1.2700 +
  1.2701 +template <class T>
  1.2702 +inline TPckgBuf<T>::TPckgBuf(const T &aRef)
  1.2703 +	: TAlignedBuf8<sizeof(T)>(sizeof(T))
  1.2704 +/**
  1.2705 +Constructs a packaged modifiable buffer descriptor for an object whose type 
  1.2706 +is defined by the template parameter and copies the supplied object into the 
  1.2707 +descriptor.
  1.2708 +
  1.2709 +The length of the packaged descriptor is set to the length of the templated 
  1.2710 +class.
  1.2711 +
  1.2712 +@param aRef The source object to be copied into the packaged modifiable buffer 
  1.2713 +            descriptor.
  1.2714 +*/
  1.2715 +	{new(&this->iBuf[0]) T(aRef);}
  1.2716 +
  1.2717 +
  1.2718 +
  1.2719 +
  1.2720 +template <class T>
  1.2721 +inline TPckgBuf<T> &TPckgBuf<T>::operator=(const TPckgBuf<T> &aRef)
  1.2722 +/**
  1.2723 +Copies data from the specified packaged modifiable buffer descriptor into this 
  1.2724 +packaged modifiable buffer descriptor, replacing any existing data.
  1.2725 +
  1.2726 +@param aRef The source packaged modifiable buffer descriptor. 
  1.2727 +@return A reference to this packaged modifiable descriptor.
  1.2728 +*/
  1.2729 +	{this->Copy(aRef);return(*this);}
  1.2730 +
  1.2731 +
  1.2732 +
  1.2733 +
  1.2734 +template <class T>
  1.2735 +inline T &TPckgBuf<T>::operator=(const T &aRef)
  1.2736 +/**
  1.2737 +Copies data from the specified object into this packaged modifiable buffer 
  1.2738 +descriptor, replacing any existing data.
  1.2739 +
  1.2740 +@param aRef The source object. 
  1.2741 +@return A reference to the copy of the source object in the packaged modifiable 
  1.2742 +        buffer descriptor.
  1.2743 +*/
  1.2744 +	{this->Copy((TUint8 *)&aRef,sizeof(T));return(*((T *)&this->iBuf[0]));}
  1.2745 +
  1.2746 +
  1.2747 +
  1.2748 +
  1.2749 +template <class T>
  1.2750 +inline T &TPckgBuf<T>::operator()()
  1.2751 +/**
  1.2752 +Gets a reference to the object contained by this packaged modifiable
  1.2753 +buffer descriptor.
  1.2754 +
  1.2755 +@return The packaged object.
  1.2756 +*/
  1.2757 +	{return(*((T *)&this->iBuf[0]));}
  1.2758 +
  1.2759 +
  1.2760 +
  1.2761 +
  1.2762 +template <class T>
  1.2763 +inline const T &TPckgBuf<T>::operator()() const
  1.2764 +/**
  1.2765 +Gets a const reference to the object contained by this packaged modifiable
  1.2766 +buffer descriptor.
  1.2767 +
  1.2768 +@return The (const) packaged object.
  1.2769 +*/
  1.2770 +	{return(*((T *)&this->iBuf[0]));}
  1.2771 +
  1.2772 +
  1.2773 +
  1.2774 +
  1.2775 +// Class TRequestStatus
  1.2776 +inline TRequestStatus::TRequestStatus()
  1.2777 +/**
  1.2778 +Default constructor.
  1.2779 +*/
  1.2780 +: iFlags(0)
  1.2781 +	{}
  1.2782 +
  1.2783 +
  1.2784 +
  1.2785 +
  1.2786 +inline TRequestStatus::TRequestStatus(TInt aVal)
  1.2787 +/**
  1.2788 +Constructs an asynchronous request status object and assigns a completion value 
  1.2789 +to it.
  1.2790 +
  1.2791 +@param aVal The completion value to be assigned to the constructed request 
  1.2792 +            status object.
  1.2793 +*/
  1.2794 +	: iStatus(aVal),
  1.2795 +	iFlags(aVal==KRequestPending ? TRequestStatus::ERequestPending : 0)
  1.2796 +
  1.2797 +	{}
  1.2798 +
  1.2799 +
  1.2800 +
  1.2801 +
  1.2802 +inline TInt TRequestStatus::operator=(TInt aVal)
  1.2803 +/**
  1.2804 +Assigns the specified completion code to the request status object.
  1.2805 +
  1.2806 +@param aVal The value to be assigned.
  1.2807 +
  1.2808 +@return The value assigned.
  1.2809 +*/
  1.2810 +	{
  1.2811 +	if(aVal==KRequestPending)
  1.2812 +		iFlags|=TRequestStatus::ERequestPending;
  1.2813 +	else
  1.2814 +		iFlags&=~TRequestStatus::ERequestPending;
  1.2815 +	return (iStatus=aVal);
  1.2816 +	}
  1.2817 +
  1.2818 +
  1.2819 +
  1.2820 +
  1.2821 +inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator==(TInt aVal) const
  1.2822 +/**
  1.2823 +Tests whether the request status object's completion code is the same as
  1.2824 +the specified value.
  1.2825 +
  1.2826 +@param aVal The value to be compared.
  1.2827 +
  1.2828 +@return True, if the values are equal; false otherwise.
  1.2829 +*/
  1.2830 +	{return(iStatus==aVal);}
  1.2831 +
  1.2832 +
  1.2833 +
  1.2834 +
  1.2835 +inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator!=(TInt aVal) const
  1.2836 +/**
  1.2837 +Tests whether the request status object's completion code is not equal to
  1.2838 +the specified value.
  1.2839 +
  1.2840 +@param aVal The value to be compared.
  1.2841 +
  1.2842 +@return True, if the values are unequal; false otherwise.
  1.2843 +*/
  1.2844 +	{return(iStatus!=aVal);}
  1.2845 +
  1.2846 +
  1.2847 +
  1.2848 +
  1.2849 +inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator>=(TInt aVal) const
  1.2850 +/**
  1.2851 +Tests whether the request status object's completion code is greater than 
  1.2852 +or equal to the specified value.
  1.2853 +
  1.2854 +@param aVal The value to be compared.
  1.2855 +
  1.2856 +@return True, if the request status object's value is greater than or equal 
  1.2857 +        to the specified value; false, otherwise.
  1.2858 +*/
  1.2859 +	{return(iStatus>=aVal);}
  1.2860 +
  1.2861 +
  1.2862 +
  1.2863 +
  1.2864 +inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator<=(TInt aVal) const
  1.2865 +/**
  1.2866 +Tests whether the request status object's completion code is less than or 
  1.2867 +equal to the specified value.
  1.2868 +
  1.2869 +@param aVal The value to be compared.
  1.2870 +
  1.2871 +@return True, if the request status object's value is less than or equal 
  1.2872 +        to the specified value; false, otherwise.
  1.2873 +*/
  1.2874 +	{return(iStatus<=aVal);}
  1.2875 +
  1.2876 +
  1.2877 +
  1.2878 +
  1.2879 +inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator>(TInt aVal) const
  1.2880 +/**
  1.2881 +Tests whether the request status object's completion code is greater than 
  1.2882 +the specified value.
  1.2883 +
  1.2884 +@param aVal The value to be compared.
  1.2885 +
  1.2886 +@return True, if the request status object's value is greater than
  1.2887 +        the specified value; false, otherwise.
  1.2888 +*/
  1.2889 +	{return(iStatus>aVal);}
  1.2890 +
  1.2891 +
  1.2892 +
  1.2893 +
  1.2894 +inline TBool TRequestStatus::operator<(TInt aVal) const
  1.2895 +/**
  1.2896 +Tests whether the request status object's completion code is less than the 
  1.2897 +specified value.
  1.2898 +
  1.2899 +@param aVal The value to be compared.
  1.2900 +
  1.2901 +@return True, if the request status object's value is less than the specified 
  1.2902 +        value; false, otherwise.
  1.2903 +*/
  1.2904 +	{return(iStatus<aVal);}
  1.2905 +
  1.2906 +
  1.2907 +
  1.2908 +
  1.2909 +inline TInt TRequestStatus::Int() const
  1.2910 +/**
  1.2911 +Gets this request status object's completion code value.
  1.2912 +
  1.2913 +@return The completion code.
  1.2914 +*/
  1.2915 +	{return(iStatus);}
  1.2916 +
  1.2917 +
  1.2918 +
  1.2919 +
  1.2920 +// Class TPoint
  1.2921 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.2922 +inline TPoint::TPoint()
  1.2923 +	: iX(0),iY(0)
  1.2924 +/**
  1.2925 +Constructs default point, initialising its iX and iY members to zero.
  1.2926 +*/
  1.2927 +	{}
  1.2928 +
  1.2929 +
  1.2930 +
  1.2931 +
  1.2932 +inline TPoint::TPoint(TInt aX,TInt aY)
  1.2933 +	: iX(aX),iY(aY)
  1.2934 +/**
  1.2935 +Constructs a point with the specified x and y co-ordinates.
  1.2936 +
  1.2937 +@param aX The x co-ordinate value.
  1.2938 +@param aY The y co-ordinate value.
  1.2939 +*/
  1.2940 +	{}
  1.2941 +
  1.2942 +
  1.2943 +
  1.2944 +
  1.2945 +// Class TSize
  1.2946 +inline TSize::TSize()
  1.2947 +	: iWidth(0),iHeight(0)
  1.2948 +/**
  1.2949 +Constructs the size object with its iWidth and iHeight members set to zero.
  1.2950 +*/
  1.2951 +	{}
  1.2952 +
  1.2953 +
  1.2954 +
  1.2955 +
  1.2956 +inline TSize::TSize(TInt aWidth,TInt aHeight)
  1.2957 +	: iWidth(aWidth),iHeight(aHeight)
  1.2958 +/**
  1.2959 +Constructs the size object with the specified width and height values.
  1.2960 +
  1.2961 +@param aWidth The width value.
  1.2962 +@param aHeight The height value .
  1.2963 +*/
  1.2964 +	{}
  1.2965 +#endif
  1.2966 +
  1.2967 +
  1.2968 +
  1.2969 +
  1.2970 +// Class TFindHandle
  1.2971 +inline TFindHandle::TFindHandle()
  1.2972 +	: iHandle(0), iSpare1(0), iObjectIdLow(0), iObjectIdHigh(0)
  1.2973 +	{}
  1.2974 +
  1.2975 +
  1.2976 +
  1.2977 +
  1.2978 +inline TInt TFindHandle::Handle() const
  1.2979 +/**
  1.2980 +@publishedAll
  1.2981 +@released
  1.2982 +
  1.2983 +Gets the find-handle number associated with the Kernel object. 
  1.2984 +
  1.2985 +The find-handle number identifies the kernel object with respect to
  1.2986 +its container.
  1.2987 +	
  1.2988 +Note that setting the find-handle number into a TFindHandle object is not
  1.2989 +implemented by this class; it is implemented by derived classes, typically by
  1.2990 +their Next() member functions. The class TFindSemaphore is a good example.
  1.2991 +	
  1.2992 +@return The find-handle number.
  1.2993 +*/
  1.2994 +	{return iHandle;}
  1.2995 +
  1.2996 +
  1.2997 +
  1.2998 +
  1.2999 +#ifdef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.3000 +const TInt KFindHandleUniqueIdShift=16;    ///< @internalComponent
  1.3001 +const TInt KFindHandleUniqueIdMask=0x7fff; ///< @internalComponent
  1.3002 +const TInt KFindHandleIndexMask=0x7fff;    ///< @internalComponent
  1.3003 +
  1.3004 +
  1.3005 +
  1.3006 +
  1.3007 +/**
  1.3008 +Gets the index into its container at which the kernel object was last seen.
  1.3009 +
  1.3010 +@return The object's index in its container.
  1.3011 +*/
  1.3012 +inline TInt TFindHandle::Index() const
  1.3013 +	{return(iHandle&KFindHandleIndexMask);}
  1.3014 +
  1.3015 +
  1.3016 +
  1.3017 +
  1.3018 +/**
  1.3019 +Gets the unique ID of the kernel container this object resides in.
  1.3020 +
  1.3021 +@return The ID of this object's container.
  1.3022 +*/
  1.3023 +inline TInt TFindHandle::UniqueID() const
  1.3024 +	{return((iHandle>>KFindHandleUniqueIdShift)&KFindHandleUniqueIdMask);}
  1.3025 +
  1.3026 +
  1.3027 +
  1.3028 +
  1.3029 +/**
  1.3030 +Gets the unique ID of the kernel object itself.
  1.3031 +
  1.3032 +@return The ID of the object.
  1.3033 +*/
  1.3034 +inline TUint64 TFindHandle::ObjectID() const
  1.3035 +	{return MAKE_TUINT64(iObjectIdHigh, iObjectIdLow);}
  1.3036 +
  1.3037 +
  1.3038 +
  1.3039 +
  1.3040 +/**
  1.3041 +Sets the find handle to refer to a specific object.
  1.3042 +
  1.3043 +@oaram aIndex The current index of the object in its container.
  1.3044 +@param aUniqueId The unique ID of the container object.
  1.3045 +@param aObjectId The unique ID of the object iteself.
  1.3046 +*/
  1.3047 +inline void TFindHandle::Set(TInt aIndex, TInt aUniqueId, TUint64 aObjectId)
  1.3048 +	{
  1.3049 +	iHandle=(TInt)((aUniqueId<<KFindHandleUniqueIdShift)|aIndex);
  1.3050 +	iObjectIdLow=I64LOW(aObjectId);
  1.3051 +	iObjectIdHigh=I64HIGH(aObjectId);
  1.3052 +	}
  1.3053 +
  1.3054 +
  1.3055 +#else
  1.3056 +
  1.3057 +
  1.3058 +/**
  1.3059 +Resets the find handle to its initial state.
  1.3060 +*/
  1.3061 +inline void TFindHandle::Reset()
  1.3062 +	{
  1.3063 +	iHandle=iSpare1=iObjectIdLow=iObjectIdHigh=0;
  1.3064 +	}
  1.3065 +#endif
  1.3066 +
  1.3067 +
  1.3068 +
  1.3069 +
  1.3070 +// Class RHandleBase
  1.3071 +inline RHandleBase::RHandleBase()
  1.3072 +	: iHandle(0)
  1.3073 +/**
  1.3074 +Default constructor.
  1.3075 +*/
  1.3076 +	{}
  1.3077 +
  1.3078 +
  1.3079 +
  1.3080 +
  1.3081 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.3082 +inline RHandleBase::RHandleBase(TInt aHandle)
  1.3083 +	: iHandle(aHandle)
  1.3084 +/**
  1.3085 +Copy constructor.
  1.3086 +
  1.3087 +It constructs this handle from an existing one. Specifically, the handle-number 
  1.3088 +encapsulated by the specified handle is copied to this handle.
  1.3089 +
  1.3090 +@param aHandle The existing handle to be copied.
  1.3091 +*/
  1.3092 +	{}
  1.3093 +#endif
  1.3094 +
  1.3095 +
  1.3096 +
  1.3097 +
  1.3098 +inline void RHandleBase::SetHandle(TInt aHandle)
  1.3099 +/**
  1.3100 +Sets the handle-number of this handle to the specified 
  1.3101 +value.
  1.3102 +
  1.3103 +@param aHandle The handle-number to be set.
  1.3104 +*/
  1.3105 +	{ iHandle=aHandle; }
  1.3106 +
  1.3107 +
  1.3108 +
  1.3109 +
  1.3110 +inline TInt RHandleBase::Handle() const
  1.3111 +/**
  1.3112 +Retrieves the handle-number of the object associated with this handle.
  1.3113 +
  1.3114 +@return The handle number
  1.3115 +*/
  1.3116 +	{return(iHandle);}
  1.3117 +
  1.3118 +
  1.3119 +
  1.3120 +
  1.3121 +inline TInt RHandleBase::SetReturnedHandle(TInt aHandleOrError)
  1.3122 +/**
  1.3123 +Sets the handle-number of this handle to the specified 
  1.3124 +value.
  1.3125 +
  1.3126 +The function can take a (zero or positive) handle-number,
  1.3127 +or a (negative) error number.
  1.3128 +
  1.3129 +If aHandleOrError represents a handle-number, then the handle-number of this handle
  1.3130 +is set to that value.
  1.3131 +If aHandleOrError represents an error number, then the handle-number of this handle is set to zero
  1.3132 +and the negative value is returned.
  1.3133 +
  1.3134 +@param aHandleOrError A handle-number, if zero or positive; an error value, if negative.
  1.3135 +
  1.3136 +@return KErrNone, if aHandle is a handle-number; the value of aHandleOrError, otherwise.
  1.3137 +*/
  1.3138 +	{
  1.3139 +	if(aHandleOrError>=0)
  1.3140 +		{
  1.3141 +		iHandle = aHandleOrError;
  1.3142 +		return KErrNone;
  1.3143 +		}
  1.3144 +	iHandle = 0;
  1.3145 +	return aHandleOrError;
  1.3146 +	}
  1.3147 +
  1.3148 +
  1.3149 +
  1.3150 +
  1.3151 +// Class RSemaphore
  1.3152 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.3153 +inline TInt RSemaphore::Open(const TFindSemaphore& aFind,TOwnerType aType)
  1.3154 +/**
  1.3155 +Opens a handle to the global semaphore found using a TFindSemaphore object.
  1.3156 +
  1.3157 +A TFindSemaphore object is used to find all global semaphores whose full names 
  1.3158 +match a specified pattern.
  1.3159 +
  1.3160 +By default, any thread in the process can use this instance of RSemaphore 
  1.3161 +to access the semaphore. However, specifying EOwnerThread as the second parameter 
  1.3162 +to this function, means that only the opening thread can use this instance 
  1.3163 +of RSemaphore to access the semaphore; any other thread in this process that 
  1.3164 +wants to access the semaphore must either duplicate the handle or use OpenGlobal() 
  1.3165 +again.
  1.3166 +
  1.3167 +@param aFind A reference to the TFindSemaphore object used to find the semaphore. 
  1.3168 +@param aType An enumeration whose enumerators define the ownership of this 
  1.3169 +             semaphore handle. If not explicitly specified, EOwnerProcess is
  1.3170 +			 taken as default. 
  1.3171 +
  1.3172 +@return KErrNone if successful otherwise another of the system wide error codes.
  1.3173 +*/
  1.3174 +	{return(RHandleBase::Open((const TFindHandleBase&)aFind,aType));}
  1.3175 +#endif
  1.3176 +
  1.3177 +
  1.3178 +
  1.3179 +
  1.3180 +// Class RFastLock
  1.3181 +
  1.3182 +
  1.3183 +/**
  1.3184 +Default constructor.
  1.3185 +*/
  1.3186 +inline RFastLock::RFastLock()
  1.3187 +	:	iCount(0)
  1.3188 +	{}
  1.3189 +
  1.3190 +
  1.3191 +
  1.3192 +
  1.3193 +// Class RMessagePtr2
  1.3194 +
  1.3195 +
  1.3196 +/**
  1.3197 +Default constructor
  1.3198 +*/
  1.3199 +inline RMessagePtr2::RMessagePtr2()
  1.3200 +	: iHandle(0)
  1.3201 +	{}
  1.3202 +
  1.3203 +
  1.3204 +
  1.3205 +
  1.3206 +/**
  1.3207 +Tests whether this message handle is empty.
  1.3208 +
  1.3209 +@return True, if this message handle is empty, false, otherwise.
  1.3210 +*/
  1.3211 +inline TBool RMessagePtr2::IsNull() const
  1.3212 +	{return iHandle==0;}
  1.3213 +
  1.3214 +
  1.3215 +
  1.3216 +
  1.3217 +/**
  1.3218 +Gets the message handle value.
  1.3219 +
  1.3220 +@return The message handle value.
  1.3221 +*/
  1.3222 +inline TInt RMessagePtr2::Handle() const
  1.3223 +	{return iHandle;}
  1.3224 +inline TBool operator==(RMessagePtr2 aLeft,RMessagePtr2 aRight)
  1.3225 +	{return aLeft.Handle()==aRight.Handle();}
  1.3226 +inline TBool operator!=(RMessagePtr2 aLeft,RMessagePtr2 aRight)
  1.3227 +	{return aLeft.Handle()!=aRight.Handle();}
  1.3228 +
  1.3229 +
  1.3230 +
  1.3231 +
  1.3232 +
  1.3233 +// Class RMessage
  1.3234 +
  1.3235 +
  1.3236 +/**
  1.3237 +Default constructor
  1.3238 +*/
  1.3239 +inline RMessage2::RMessage2()
  1.3240 +	{}
  1.3241 +
  1.3242 +
  1.3243 +
  1.3244 +
  1.3245 +/**
  1.3246 +Gets the the number of the function requested by the client.
  1.3247 +
  1.3248 +@return The function number. 
  1.3249 +*/
  1.3250 +inline TInt RMessage2::Function() const
  1.3251 +	{return(iFunction);}
  1.3252 +
  1.3253 +
  1.3254 +
  1.3255 +
  1.3256 +/**
  1.3257 +Gets the first message argument as an integer value.
  1.3258 +
  1.3259 +@return The first message argument.
  1.3260 +*/
  1.3261 +inline TInt RMessage2::Int0() const
  1.3262 +	{return(iArgs[0]);}
  1.3263 +
  1.3264 +
  1.3265 +
  1.3266 +
  1.3267 +/**
  1.3268 +Gets the second message argument as an integer value.
  1.3269 +
  1.3270 +@return The second message argument.
  1.3271 +*/
  1.3272 +inline TInt RMessage2::Int1() const
  1.3273 +	{return(iArgs[1]);}
  1.3274 +
  1.3275 +
  1.3276 +
  1.3277 +
  1.3278 +/**
  1.3279 +Gets the third message argument as an integer value.
  1.3280 +
  1.3281 +@return The third message argument.
  1.3282 +*/
  1.3283 +inline TInt RMessage2::Int2() const
  1.3284 +	{return(iArgs[2]);}
  1.3285 +
  1.3286 +
  1.3287 +
  1.3288 +/**
  1.3289 +Gets the fourth message argument as an integer value.
  1.3290 +
  1.3291 +@return The fourth message argument.
  1.3292 +*/
  1.3293 +inline TInt RMessage2::Int3() const
  1.3294 +	{return(iArgs[3]);}
  1.3295 +
  1.3296 +
  1.3297 +
  1.3298 +/**
  1.3299 +Gets the first message argument as a pointer type.
  1.3300 +
  1.3301 +@return The first message argument.
  1.3302 +*/
  1.3303 +inline const TAny *RMessage2::Ptr0() const
  1.3304 +	{return((const TAny *)iArgs[0]);}
  1.3305 +
  1.3306 +
  1.3307 +
  1.3308 +
  1.3309 +/**
  1.3310 +Gets the second message argument as a pointer type.
  1.3311 +
  1.3312 +@return The second message argument.
  1.3313 +*/
  1.3314 +inline const TAny *RMessage2::Ptr1() const
  1.3315 +	{return((const TAny *)iArgs[1]);}
  1.3316 +
  1.3317 +
  1.3318 +
  1.3319 +
  1.3320 +/**
  1.3321 +Gets the third message argument as a pointer type.
  1.3322 +
  1.3323 +@return The third message argument.
  1.3324 +*/
  1.3325 +inline const TAny *RMessage2::Ptr2() const
  1.3326 +	{return((const TAny *)iArgs[2]);}
  1.3327 +
  1.3328 +
  1.3329 +
  1.3330 +
  1.3331 +/**
  1.3332 +Gets the fourth message argument as a pointer type.
  1.3333 +
  1.3334 +@return The fourth message argument.
  1.3335 +*/
  1.3336 +inline const TAny *RMessage2::Ptr3() const
  1.3337 +	{return((const TAny *)iArgs[3]);}
  1.3338 +
  1.3339 +
  1.3340 +
  1.3341 +/**
  1.3342 +Gets a pointer to the session.
  1.3343 +
  1.3344 +@return A pointer to the session object.
  1.3345 +*/
  1.3346 +inline CSession2* RMessage2::Session() const
  1.3347 +	{return (CSession2*)iSessionPtr; }
  1.3348 +
  1.3349 +
  1.3350 +
  1.3351 +
  1.3352 +// Class TUid
  1.3353 +inline TUid TUid::Uid(TInt aUid)
  1.3354 +/**
  1.3355 +Constructs the TUid object from a 32-bit integer.
  1.3356 +
  1.3357 +@param aUid The 32-bit integer value from which the TUid object is to be
  1.3358 +            constructed.
  1.3359 +
  1.3360 +@return The constructed TUid object.
  1.3361 +*/
  1.3362 +	{TUid uid={aUid};return uid;}
  1.3363 +
  1.3364 +
  1.3365 +
  1.3366 +
  1.3367 +inline TUid TUid::Null()
  1.3368 +/**
  1.3369 +Constructs a Null-valued TUid object.
  1.3370 +
  1.3371 +@return The constructed Null-valued TUid object.
  1.3372 +*/
  1.3373 +	{TUid uid={KNullUidValue};return uid;}
  1.3374 +
  1.3375 +
  1.3376 +
  1.3377 +
  1.3378 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.3379 +// Template class TArray
  1.3380 +template <class T>
  1.3381 +inline TArray<T>::TArray(TInt (*aCount)(const CBase *aPtr),const TAny *(*anAt)(const CBase *aPtr,TInt anIndex),const CBase *aPtr)
  1.3382 +	: iPtr(aPtr),iCount(aCount),iAt(anAt)
  1.3383 +/**
  1.3384 +Constructor.
  1.3385 +
  1.3386 +A TArray object is not intended to be instantiated explicitly. An object of
  1.3387 +this type is instantiated as a result of a call to to the Array() member
  1.3388 +function of a concrete array class
  1.3389 +
  1.3390 +@param aCount A pointer to a function which takes a
  1.3391 +              @code
  1.3392 +			  const CBase*
  1.3393 +              @endcode
  1.3394 +              argument and returns a
  1.3395 +              @code
  1.3396 +              TInt
  1.3397 +              @endcode
  1.3398 +              aCount must point to the member function which returns the
  1.3399 +              current number of elements of type class T contained in the
  1.3400 +	          array at aPtr, for which this TArray is being constructed.
  1.3401 +              This argument is supplied by the Array() member function of the
  1.3402 +              array class. 
  1.3403 +@param anAt   A pointer to a function which takes a
  1.3404 +              @code
  1.3405 +              const CBase*
  1.3406 +              @endcode
  1.3407 +              and a 
  1.3408 +              @code
  1.3409 +              TInt
  1.3410 +              @endcode
  1.3411 +              argument, and returns a pointer to
  1.3412 +              @code
  1.3413 +              TAny
  1.3414 +              @endcode
  1.3415 +              anAt must point to the member function which returns a reference
  1.3416 +              to the element located at position anIndex within the array at
  1.3417 +              aPtr, for which this TArray is being constructed.
  1.3418 +              This argument is supplied by the Array() member function of the
  1.3419 +              array class.
  1.3420 +@param aPtr   A pointer to the array for which this TArray is being
  1.3421 +              constructed. This argument is supplied by the Array() member
  1.3422 +              function of the array class.
  1.3423 +
  1.3424 +@see CArrayFixFlat::Array
  1.3425 +@see CArrayFixSeg::Array
  1.3426 +@see CArrayVarFlat::Array
  1.3427 +@see CArrayVarSeg::Array
  1.3428 +@see CArrayPakFlat::Array
  1.3429 +@see RArray::Array
  1.3430 +@see RPointerArray::Array
  1.3431 +@see RArray<TInt>::Array
  1.3432 +@see RArray<TUint>::Array
  1.3433 +*/
  1.3434 +	{}
  1.3435 +
  1.3436 +
  1.3437 +
  1.3438 +
  1.3439 +template <class T>
  1.3440 +inline TInt TArray<T>::Count() const
  1.3441 +/**
  1.3442 +Gets the number of elements currently held in the array for which this generic 
  1.3443 +array has been constructed.
  1.3444 +
  1.3445 +@return The number of array elements.
  1.3446 +*/
  1.3447 +	{return((*iCount)(iPtr));}
  1.3448 +
  1.3449 +
  1.3450 +
  1.3451 +
  1.3452 +template <class T>
  1.3453 +inline const T &TArray<T>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
  1.3454 +/**
  1.3455 +Gets a reference to the element located at the specified position.
  1.3456 +
  1.3457 +The returned reference is const and cannot be used to change the element.
  1.3458 +Any member function of the referenced template class T must be declared
  1.3459 +as const if that function is to be accessed through this operator.
  1.3460 +
  1.3461 +@param anIndex The position of the element within the array for which this
  1.3462 +               TArray has been constructed. The position is relative to zero;
  1.3463 +			   i.e. zero implies the first element in the array. 
  1.3464 +
  1.3465 +@return A const reference to the element located at position anIndex within
  1.3466 +        the array for which this TArray has been constructed.
  1.3467 +
  1.3468 +@panic E32USER-CBase 21, if anIndex is negative, or greater than or equal to
  1.3469 +       the number of objects currently within the array.
  1.3470 +*/
  1.3471 +	{return(*((const T *)(*iAt)(iPtr,anIndex)));}
  1.3472 +#endif
  1.3473 +
  1.3474 +
  1.3475 +
  1.3476 +
  1.3477 +// Class TIdentityRelation<T>
  1.3478 +template <class T>
  1.3479 +inline TIdentityRelation<T>::TIdentityRelation( TBool (*anIdentity)(const T&, const T&) )
  1.3480 +/**
  1.3481 +Constructs the object taking the specified function as an argument.
  1.3482 +
  1.3483 +The specified function should implement an algorithm for determining whether
  1.3484 +two class T type objects match. It should return:
  1.3485 +
  1.3486 +1. true, if the two objects match.
  1.3487 +
  1.3488 +2. false, if the two objects do not match.
  1.3489 +
  1.3490 +@param anIdentity A pointer to a function that takes constant references to two
  1.3491 +                  class T objects and returns a TInt value. 
  1.3492 +*/
  1.3493 +	{ iIdentity=(TGeneralIdentityRelation)anIdentity; }
  1.3494 +
  1.3495 +
  1.3496 +
  1.3497 +
  1.3498 +template <class T>
  1.3499 +inline TIdentityRelation<T>::operator TGeneralIdentityRelation() const
  1.3500 +/**
  1.3501 +Operator that gets the function that determines whether two
  1.3502 +objects of a given class type match.
  1.3503 +*/
  1.3504 +	{ return iIdentity; }
  1.3505 +
  1.3506 +
  1.3507 +
  1.3508 +
  1.3509 +// Class TLinearOrder<T>
  1.3510 +template <class T>
  1.3511 +inline TLinearOrder<T>::TLinearOrder( TInt(*anOrder)(const T&, const T&) )
  1.3512 +/**
  1.3513 +Constructs the object taking the specified function as an argument.
  1.3514 +
  1.3515 +The specified function should implement an algorithm that determines the
  1.3516 +order of two class T type objects. It should return:
  1.3517 +
  1.3518 +1. zero, if the two objects are equal.
  1.3519 +
  1.3520 +2. a negative value, if the first object is less than the second.
  1.3521 +
  1.3522 +3. a positive value, if the first object is greater than the second.
  1.3523 +
  1.3524 +@param anOrder A pointer to a function that takes constant references to two
  1.3525 +               class T objects and returns a TInt value. 
  1.3526 +*/
  1.3527 +	{ iOrder=(TGeneralLinearOrder)anOrder; }
  1.3528 +
  1.3529 +
  1.3530 +
  1.3531 +
  1.3532 +template <class T>
  1.3533 +inline TLinearOrder<T>::operator TGeneralLinearOrder() const
  1.3534 +/**
  1.3535 +Operator that gets the function that determines the order of two
  1.3536 +objects of a given class type.
  1.3537 +*/
  1.3538 +	{ return iOrder; }
  1.3539 +
  1.3540 +
  1.3541 +
  1.3542 +
  1.3543 +// Class RPointerArray<T>
  1.3544 +
  1.3545 +/**
  1.3546 +Default C++ constructor.
  1.3547 +
  1.3548 +This constructs an array object for an array of pointers with default
  1.3549 +granularity, which is 8.
  1.3550 +*/
  1.3551 +template <class T>
  1.3552 +inline RPointerArray<T>::RPointerArray()
  1.3553 +	: RPointerArrayBase()
  1.3554 +	{}
  1.3555 +
  1.3556 +
  1.3557 +
  1.3558 +
  1.3559 +/**
  1.3560 +C++ constructor with granularity.
  1.3561 +
  1.3562 +This constructs an array object for an array of pointers with the specified 
  1.3563 +granularity.
  1.3564 +
  1.3565 +@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
  1.3566 +
  1.3567 +@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive, or greater than or equal
  1.3568 +       to 0x10000000.
  1.3569 +*/
  1.3570 +template <class T>
  1.3571 +inline RPointerArray<T>::RPointerArray(TInt aGranularity)
  1.3572 +	: RPointerArrayBase(aGranularity)
  1.3573 +	{}
  1.3574 +
  1.3575 +
  1.3576 +
  1.3577 +
  1.3578 +/**
  1.3579 +C++ constructor with minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
  1.3580 +
  1.3581 +This constructs an array object for an array of pointers with the specified 
  1.3582 +minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
  1.3583 +
  1.3584 +@param aMinGrowBy	The minimum growth step of the array. Must be between 1 and
  1.3585 +					65535 inclusive.
  1.3586 +@param aFactor		The factor by which the array grows, multiplied by 256.
  1.3587 +					For example 512 specifies a factor of 2. Must be between 257
  1.3588 +					and 32767 inclusive.
  1.3589 +
  1.3590 +@panic USER 192, if aMinGrowBy<=0 or aMinGrowBy>65535.
  1.3591 +@panic USER 193, if aFactor<=257 or aFactor>32767.
  1.3592 +*/
  1.3593 +template <class T>
  1.3594 +inline RPointerArray<T>::RPointerArray(TInt aMinGrowBy, TInt aFactor)
  1.3595 +	: RPointerArrayBase(aMinGrowBy, aFactor)
  1.3596 +	{}
  1.3597 +
  1.3598 +
  1.3599 +
  1.3600 +
  1.3601 +template <class T>
  1.3602 +inline void RPointerArray<T>::Close()
  1.3603 +/**
  1.3604 +Closes the array and frees all memory allocated to it.
  1.3605 +
  1.3606 +The function must be called before this array object goes out of scope.
  1.3607 +
  1.3608 +Note that the function does not delete the objects whose pointers are contained
  1.3609 +in the array.
  1.3610 +*/
  1.3611 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Close();}
  1.3612 +
  1.3613 +
  1.3614 +
  1.3615 +
  1.3616 +template <class T>
  1.3617 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Count() const
  1.3618 +/**
  1.3619 +Gets the number of object pointers in the array.
  1.3620 +
  1.3621 +@return The number of object pointers in the array.
  1.3622 +*/
  1.3623 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Count(); }
  1.3624 +
  1.3625 +
  1.3626 +
  1.3627 +
  1.3628 +template <class T>
  1.3629 +inline T* const& RPointerArray<T>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
  1.3630 +/**
  1.3631 +Gets a reference to the object pointer located at the specified 
  1.3632 +position within the array.
  1.3633 +
  1.3634 +The compiler chooses this option if the returned reference is used in
  1.3635 +an expression where the reference cannot be modified.
  1.3636 +
  1.3637 +@param anIndex The position of the object pointer within the array. The
  1.3638 +               position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object
  1.3639 +			   pointer at the beginning of the array.
  1.3640 +
  1.3641 +@return A const reference to the object pointer at position anIndex within 
  1.3642 +        the array.
  1.3643 +
  1.3644 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
  1.3645 +       objects currently in the array.
  1.3646 +*/
  1.3647 +	{return (T* const&)At(anIndex);}
  1.3648 +
  1.3649 +
  1.3650 +
  1.3651 +
  1.3652 +template <class T>
  1.3653 +inline T*& RPointerArray<T>::operator[](TInt anIndex)
  1.3654 +/**
  1.3655 +Gets a reference to the object pointer located at the specified 
  1.3656 +position within the array.
  1.3657 +
  1.3658 +The compiler chooses this option if the returned reference is used in
  1.3659 +an expression where the reference can be modified.
  1.3660 +
  1.3661 +@param anIndex The position of the object pointer within the array. The
  1.3662 +               position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object
  1.3663 +			   pointer at the beginning of the array.
  1.3664 +
  1.3665 +@return A non-const reference to the object pointer at position anIndex within 
  1.3666 +        the array.
  1.3667 +
  1.3668 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
  1.3669 +       objects currently in the array.
  1.3670 +*/
  1.3671 +	{return (T*&)At(anIndex);}
  1.3672 +
  1.3673 +
  1.3674 +
  1.3675 +
  1.3676 +template <class T>
  1.3677 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Append(const T* anEntry)
  1.3678 +/**
  1.3679 +Appends an object pointer onto the array.
  1.3680 +
  1.3681 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be appended.
  1.3682 +
  1.3683 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.3684 +        wide error codes.
  1.3685 +*/
  1.3686 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Append(anEntry); }
  1.3687 +
  1.3688 +
  1.3689 +
  1.3690 +
  1.3691 +template <class T>
  1.3692 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Insert(const T* anEntry, TInt aPos)
  1.3693 +/**
  1.3694 +Inserts an object pointer into the array at the specified position.
  1.3695 +
  1.3696 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be inserted.
  1.3697 +@param aPos    The position within the array where the object pointer is to be 
  1.3698 +               inserted. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies
  1.3699 +			   that a pointer is inserted at the beginning of the array.
  1.3700 +
  1.3701 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.3702 +        wide error codes.
  1.3703 +
  1.3704 +@panic USER 131, if aPos is negative, or is greater than the number of object
  1.3705 +       pointers currently in the array.
  1.3706 +*/
  1.3707 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Insert(anEntry,aPos); }
  1.3708 +
  1.3709 +
  1.3710 +
  1.3711 +
  1.3712 +template <class T>
  1.3713 +inline void RPointerArray<T>::Remove(TInt anIndex)
  1.3714 +/**
  1.3715 +Removes the object pointer at the specified position from the array.
  1.3716 +
  1.3717 +Note that the function does not delete the object whose pointer is removed.
  1.3718 +
  1.3719 +@param anIndex The position within the array from where the object pointer 
  1.3720 +               is to be removed. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
  1.3721 +			   implies that a pointer at the beginning of the array is to be
  1.3722 +			   removed.
  1.3723 +			   
  1.3724 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
  1.3725 +       objects currently in the array. 
  1.3726 +*/
  1.3727 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Remove(anIndex);}
  1.3728 +
  1.3729 +
  1.3730 +
  1.3731 +
  1.3732 +template <class T>
  1.3733 +inline void RPointerArray<T>::Compress()
  1.3734 +/**
  1.3735 +Compresses the array down to a minimum.
  1.3736 +
  1.3737 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is just
  1.3738 +sufficient for its contained object pointers.
  1.3739 +Subsequently adding a new object pointer to the array 
  1.3740 +always results in a re-allocation of memory.
  1.3741 +*/
  1.3742 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Compress();}
  1.3743 +
  1.3744 +
  1.3745 +
  1.3746 +
  1.3747 +template <class T>
  1.3748 +inline void RPointerArray<T>::Reset()
  1.3749 +/**
  1.3750 +Empties the array.
  1.3751 +
  1.3752 +It frees all memory allocated to the array and resets the internal state so 
  1.3753 +that it is ready to be reused.
  1.3754 +
  1.3755 +This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to this
  1.3756 +function.
  1.3757 +
  1.3758 +Note that the function does not delete the objects whose pointers are contained
  1.3759 +in the array.
  1.3760 +*/
  1.3761 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Reset();}
  1.3762 +
  1.3763 +
  1.3764 +
  1.3765 +
  1.3766 +template <class T>
  1.3767 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Find(const T* anEntry) const
  1.3768 +/**
  1.3769 +Finds the first object pointer in the array which matches the specified object 
  1.3770 +pointer, using a sequential search.
  1.3771 +
  1.3772 +Matching is based on the comparison of pointers.
  1.3773 +
  1.3774 +The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There 
  1.3775 +is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
  1.3776 +
  1.3777 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
  1.3778 +@return The index of the first matching object pointer within the array.
  1.3779 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching object pointer can be found.
  1.3780 +*/
  1.3781 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Find(anEntry); }
  1.3782 +
  1.3783 +
  1.3784 +
  1.3785 +
  1.3786 +template <class T>
  1.3787 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Find(const T* anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) const
  1.3788 +/**
  1.3789 +Finds the first object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified 
  1.3790 +object, using a sequential search and a matching algorithm.
  1.3791 +
  1.3792 +The algorithm for determining whether two class T objects match is provided 
  1.3793 +by a function supplied by the caller.
  1.3794 +
  1.3795 +The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There 
  1.3796 +is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
  1.3797 +
  1.3798 +@param anEntry    The object pointer to be found.
  1.3799 +@param anIdentity A package encapsulating the function which determines whether 
  1.3800 +                  two class T objects match.
  1.3801 +
  1.3802 +@return The index of the first matching object pointer within the array.
  1.3803 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.3804 +*/
  1.3805 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Find(anEntry,anIdentity); }
  1.3806 +
  1.3807 +
  1.3808 +
  1.3809 +
  1.3810 +template <class T>
  1.3811 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindReverse(const T* anEntry) const
  1.3812 +/**
  1.3813 +Finds the last object pointer in the array which matches the specified object 
  1.3814 +pointer, using a sequential search.
  1.3815 +
  1.3816 +Matching is based on the comparison of pointers.
  1.3817 +
  1.3818 +The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There 
  1.3819 +is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
  1.3820 +
  1.3821 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
  1.3822 +@return The index of the last matching object pointer within the array.
  1.3823 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching object pointer can be found.
  1.3824 +*/
  1.3825 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindReverse(anEntry); }
  1.3826 +
  1.3827 +
  1.3828 +
  1.3829 +
  1.3830 +template <class T>
  1.3831 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindReverse(const T* anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) const
  1.3832 +/**
  1.3833 +Finds the last object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified 
  1.3834 +object, using a sequential search and a matching algorithm.
  1.3835 +
  1.3836 +The algorithm for determining whether two class T objects match is provided 
  1.3837 +by a function supplied by the caller.
  1.3838 +
  1.3839 +The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There 
  1.3840 +is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
  1.3841 +
  1.3842 +@param anEntry    The object pointer to be found.
  1.3843 +@param anIdentity A package encapsulating the function which determines whether 
  1.3844 +                  two class T objects match.
  1.3845 +
  1.3846 +@return The index of the last matching object pointer within the array.
  1.3847 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.3848 +*/
  1.3849 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindReverse(anEntry,anIdentity); }
  1.3850 +
  1.3851 +
  1.3852 +
  1.3853 +
  1.3854 +template <class T>
  1.3855 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindInAddressOrder(const T* anEntry) const
  1.3856 +/**
  1.3857 +Finds the object pointer in the array that matches the specified object
  1.3858 +pointer, using a binary search technique.
  1.3859 +
  1.3860 +The function assumes that object pointers in the array are in address order.
  1.3861 +
  1.3862 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
  1.3863 +
  1.3864 +@return The index of the matching object pointer within the array or KErrNotFound 
  1.3865 +        if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.3866 +*/
  1.3867 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry); }
  1.3868 +
  1.3869 +
  1.3870 +
  1.3871 +
  1.3872 +template <class T>
  1.3873 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindInOrder(const T* anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder) const
  1.3874 +/**
  1.3875 +Finds the object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified
  1.3876 +object, using a binary search technique and an ordering algorithm.
  1.3877 +
  1.3878 +The function assumes that existing object pointers in the array are ordered 
  1.3879 +so that the objects themselves are in object order as determined by an algorithm 
  1.3880 +supplied by the caller and packaged as a TLinearOrder<T>.
  1.3881 +
  1.3882 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
  1.3883 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.3884 +               of two class T objects.
  1.3885 +
  1.3886 +@return The index of the matching object pointer within the array or KErrNotFound, 
  1.3887 +        if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.3888 +*/
  1.3889 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsq(anEntry,anOrder); }
  1.3890 +
  1.3891 +
  1.3892 +
  1.3893 +
  1.3894 +template <class T>
  1.3895 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindInAddressOrder(const T* anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
  1.3896 +/**
  1.3897 +Finds the object pointer in the array that matches the specified object
  1.3898 +pointer, using a binary search technique.
  1.3899 +
  1.3900 +The function assumes that object pointers in the array are in address order.
  1.3901 +
  1.3902 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
  1.3903 +@param anIndex A TInt supplied by the caller. On return, contains an index
  1.3904 +               value:
  1.3905 +               If the function returns KErrNone, this is the index of the
  1.3906 +               matching object pointer within the array. 
  1.3907 +               If the function returns KErrNotFound,  this is the
  1.3908 +               index of the first object pointer within the array which
  1.3909 +               logically follows after anEntry.
  1.3910 +
  1.3911 +@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found.
  1.3912 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.3913 +*/
  1.3914 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,anIndex); }
  1.3915 +
  1.3916 +
  1.3917 +
  1.3918 +
  1.3919 +template <class T>
  1.3920 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::FindInOrder(const T* anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder) const
  1.3921 +/**
  1.3922 +Finds the object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified
  1.3923 +object, using a binary search technique and an ordering algorithm.
  1.3924 +
  1.3925 +The function assumes that existing object pointers in the array are ordered 
  1.3926 +so that the objects themselves are in object order as determined by an
  1.3927 +algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as a TLinearOrder<T>.
  1.3928 +
  1.3929 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
  1.3930 +@param anIndex A TInt supplied by the caller. On return, contains an
  1.3931 +               index value:
  1.3932 +               If the function returns KErrNone, this is the index of the
  1.3933 +               matching object pointer within the array. 
  1.3934 +               If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of
  1.3935 +               the first object pointer in the array whose object is larger
  1.3936 +               than the entry being searched for - if no objects pointed to in
  1.3937 +               the array are larger, then the index value is the same as the
  1.3938 +               total number of object pointers in the array.
  1.3939 +
  1.3940 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.3941 +               of two class T objects.
  1.3942 +
  1.3943 +@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found.
  1.3944 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.3945 +*/
  1.3946 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearch(anEntry,anIndex,anOrder); }
  1.3947 +
  1.3948 +
  1.3949 +
  1.3950 +
  1.3951 +template <class T>
  1.3952 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::SpecificFindInAddressOrder(const T* anEntry, TInt aMode) const
  1.3953 +/**
  1.3954 +Finds the object pointer in the array that matches the specified object
  1.3955 +pointer, using a binary search technique.
  1.3956 +
  1.3957 +Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last 
  1.3958 +or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.3959 +
  1.3960 +The function assumes that object pointers in the array are in address order.
  1.3961 +
  1.3962 +@param	anEntry The object pointer to be found.
  1.3963 +@param	aMode   Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or
  1.3964 +                any match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.3965 +
  1.3966 +@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
  1.3967 +        index of a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the
  1.3968 +        value of aMode:
  1.3969 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.3970 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.3971 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.3972 +        the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
  1.3973 +        the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.3974 +        
  1.3975 +@see TArrayFindMode
  1.3976 +*/
  1.3977 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry, aMode); }
  1.3978 +
  1.3979 +
  1.3980 +
  1.3981 +
  1.3982 +template <class T>
  1.3983 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::SpecificFindInOrder(const T* anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder, TInt aMode) const
  1.3984 +/**
  1.3985 +Finds the object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified
  1.3986 +object, using a binary search technique and an ordering algorithm.
  1.3987 +
  1.3988 +Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last
  1.3989 +or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.3990 +
  1.3991 +The function assumes that existing object pointers in the array are ordered 
  1.3992 +so that the objects themselves are in object order as determined by an algorithm 
  1.3993 +supplied by the caller and packaged as a TLinearOrder<T> type.
  1.3994 +
  1.3995 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
  1.3996 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.3997 +               of two class T objects.
  1.3998 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match,
  1.3999 +               as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.4000 +
  1.4001 +@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
  1.4002 +        index of a matching element -  what the index refers to depends on
  1.4003 +        the value of aMode:
  1.4004 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.4005 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.4006 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.4007 +        the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
  1.4008 +        then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.4009 +        
  1.4010 +@see TArrayFindMode   
  1.4011 +*/
  1.4012 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsq(anEntry,anOrder,aMode); }
  1.4013 +
  1.4014 +
  1.4015 +
  1.4016 +
  1.4017 +template <class T>
  1.4018 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::SpecificFindInAddressOrder(const T* anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
  1.4019 +/**
  1.4020 +Finds the object pointer in the array that matches the specified object
  1.4021 +pointer, using a binary search technique.
  1.4022 +
  1.4023 +Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last
  1.4024 +or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.4025 +
  1.4026 +The function assumes that object pointers in the array are in address order.
  1.4027 +
  1.4028 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
  1.4029 +@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an
  1.4030 +               index value depending on whether a match is found and on the
  1.4031 +               value of aMode.
  1.4032 +               If there is no matching element in the array, then this is
  1.4033 +               the index of the first element in the array that is bigger than
  1.4034 +               the element being searched for - if no elements in the array are
  1.4035 +               bigger, then the index value is the same as the total number of
  1.4036 +               elements in the array. If there is a matching element, then what
  1.4037 +               the index refers to depends on the value of aMode:
  1.4038 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.4039 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.4040 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows the
  1.4041 +               last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
  1.4042 +               then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.4043 +               
  1.4044 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any
  1.4045 +               match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.4046 +
  1.4047 +@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found.
  1.4048 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.4049 +        
  1.4050 +@see TArrayFindMode
  1.4051 +*/
  1.4052 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,anIndex,aMode); }
  1.4053 +
  1.4054 +
  1.4055 +
  1.4056 +
  1.4057 +template <class T>
  1.4058 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::SpecificFindInOrder(const T* anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder, TInt aMode) const
  1.4059 +/**
  1.4060 +Finds the object pointer in the array whose object matches the specified
  1.4061 +object, using a binary search technique and an ordering algorithm.
  1.4062 +
  1.4063 +Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last or any
  1.4064 +matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.4065 +
  1.4066 +The function assumes that existing object pointers in the array are ordered 
  1.4067 +so that the objects themselves are in object order as determined by an
  1.4068 +algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as a TLinearOrder<T> type.
  1.4069 +
  1.4070 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be found.
  1.4071 +@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an
  1.4072 +               index value depending on whether a match is found and on the
  1.4073 +               value of aMode. If there is no matching element in the array,
  1.4074 +               then this is the index of the first element in the array
  1.4075 +               that is bigger than the element being searched for - if
  1.4076 +               no elements in the array are bigger, then the index value
  1.4077 +               is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.4078 +               If there is a matching element, then what the index refers to
  1.4079 +               depends on the value of aMode:
  1.4080 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.4081 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.4082 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.4083 +               the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element
  1.4084 +               of the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.4085 +
  1.4086 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.4087 +               of two class T objects.
  1.4088 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or
  1.4089 +               any match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.4090 +
  1.4091 +@return KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found.
  1.4092 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.4093 +        
  1.4094 +@see TArrayFindMode
  1.4095 +*/
  1.4096 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearch(anEntry,anIndex,anOrder,aMode); }
  1.4097 +
  1.4098 +
  1.4099 +
  1.4100 +
  1.4101 +template <class T>
  1.4102 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::InsertInAddressOrder(const T* anEntry)
  1.4103 +/**
  1.4104 +Inserts an object pointer into the array in address order.
  1.4105 +
  1.4106 +No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
  1.4107 +an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
  1.4108 +
  1.4109 +The function assumes that existing object pointers within the array are in 
  1.4110 +address order.
  1.4111 +
  1.4112 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be inserted.
  1.4113 +
  1.4114 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
  1.4115 +        KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
  1.4116 +        to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
  1.4117 +        error codes.
  1.4118 +*/
  1.4119 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,EFalse); }
  1.4120 +
  1.4121 +
  1.4122 +
  1.4123 +
  1.4124 +template <class T>
  1.4125 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::InsertInOrder(const T* anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
  1.4126 +/**
  1.4127 +Inserts an object pointer into the array so that the object itself is in object 
  1.4128 +order.
  1.4129 +
  1.4130 +The algorithm for determining the order of two class T objects is provided 
  1.4131 +by a function supplied by the caller.
  1.4132 +
  1.4133 +No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
  1.4134 +an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
  1.4135 +
  1.4136 +The function assumes that the array is ordered so that the referenced objects 
  1.4137 +are in object order.
  1.4138 +
  1.4139 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be inserted.
  1.4140 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.4141 +               of two class T objects.
  1.4142 +
  1.4143 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
  1.4144 +        KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
  1.4145 +        to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
  1.4146 +        error codes.
  1.4147 +*/
  1.4148 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsq(anEntry,anOrder,EFalse); }
  1.4149 +
  1.4150 +
  1.4151 +
  1.4152 +
  1.4153 +template <class T>
  1.4154 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::InsertInAddressOrderAllowRepeats(const T* anEntry)
  1.4155 +/**
  1.4156 +Inserts an object pointer into the array in address order, allowing duplicates.
  1.4157 +
  1.4158 +If the new object pointer is a duplicate of an existing object pointer in 
  1.4159 +the array, then the new pointer is inserted after the existing one. If more 
  1.4160 +than one duplicate object pointer already exists in the array, then any new 
  1.4161 +duplicate pointer is inserted after the last one.
  1.4162 +
  1.4163 +The function assumes that existing object pointers within the array are in 
  1.4164 +address order.
  1.4165 +
  1.4166 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be inserted.
  1.4167 +
  1.4168 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.4169 +        wide error codes.
  1.4170 +*/
  1.4171 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,ETrue); }
  1.4172 +
  1.4173 +
  1.4174 +
  1.4175 +
  1.4176 +template <class T>
  1.4177 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::InsertInOrderAllowRepeats(const T* anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
  1.4178 +/**
  1.4179 +Inserts an object pointer into the array so that the object itself is in object 
  1.4180 +order, allowing duplicates
  1.4181 +
  1.4182 +The algorithm for determining the order of two class T objects is provided 
  1.4183 +by a function supplied by the caller.
  1.4184 +
  1.4185 +If the specified object is a duplicate of an existing object, then the new 
  1.4186 +pointer is inserted after the pointer to the existing object. If more than 
  1.4187 +one duplicate object already exists, then the new pointer is inserted after 
  1.4188 +the pointer to the last one.
  1.4189 +
  1.4190 +@param anEntry The object pointer to be inserted. 
  1.4191 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.4192 +               of two class T objects.
  1.4193 +
  1.4194 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.4195 +        wide error codes.
  1.4196 +*/
  1.4197 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsq(anEntry,anOrder,ETrue); }
  1.4198 +
  1.4199 +
  1.4200 +
  1.4201 +
  1.4202 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.4203 +template <class T>
  1.4204 +inline RPointerArray<T>::RPointerArray(T** aEntries, TInt aCount)
  1.4205 +	: RPointerArrayBase((TAny **)aEntries, aCount)
  1.4206 +/**
  1.4207 +C++ constructor with a pointer to the first array entry in a pre-existing
  1.4208 +array, and the number of entries in that array.
  1.4209 +
  1.4210 +This constructor takes a pointer to a pre-existing set of entries of type 
  1.4211 +pointer to class T, which is owned by another RPointerArray object. Ownership 
  1.4212 +of the set of entries still resides with the original RPointerArray object.
  1.4213 +
  1.4214 +@param aEntries A pointer to the first entry of type pointer to class T in 
  1.4215 +                the set of entries belonging to the existing array.
  1.4216 +@param aCount   The number of entries in the existing array. The granularity of
  1.4217 +                this array is set to this value.
  1.4218 +
  1.4219 +@panic USER 156, if aCount is not positive.
  1.4220 +*/
  1.4221 +	{}
  1.4222 +
  1.4223 +
  1.4224 +
  1.4225 +
  1.4226 +template <class T>
  1.4227 +inline void RPointerArray<T>::GranularCompress()
  1.4228 +/**
  1.4229 +Compresses the array down to a granular boundary.
  1.4230 +
  1.4231 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient 
  1.4232 +for its contained object pointers. Adding new object pointers to the array 
  1.4233 +does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of 
  1.4234 +pointers reaches a multiple of the granularity.
  1.4235 +*/
  1.4236 +	{RPointerArrayBase::GranularCompress();}
  1.4237 +
  1.4238 +
  1.4239 +
  1.4240 +
  1.4241 +template <class T>
  1.4242 +inline TInt RPointerArray<T>::Reserve(TInt aCount)
  1.4243 +/**
  1.4244 +Reserves space for the specified number of elements.
  1.4245 +
  1.4246 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient 
  1.4247 +to hold the number of object pointers specified. Adding new object pointers to the array 
  1.4248 +does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of 
  1.4249 +pointers exceeds the specified count.
  1.4250 +
  1.4251 +@param	aCount	The number of object pointers for which space should be reserved
  1.4252 +@return	KErrNone		If the operation completed successfully
  1.4253 +@return KErrNoMemory	If the requested amount of memory could not be allocated
  1.4254 +*/
  1.4255 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::DoReserve(aCount); }
  1.4256 +
  1.4257 +
  1.4258 +
  1.4259 +
  1.4260 +template <class T>
  1.4261 +inline void RPointerArray<T>::SortIntoAddressOrder()
  1.4262 +/**
  1.4263 +Sorts the object pointers within the array into address order.
  1.4264 +*/
  1.4265 +	{ HeapSortUnsigned(); }
  1.4266 +
  1.4267 +
  1.4268 +
  1.4269 +
  1.4270 +template <class T>
  1.4271 +inline void RPointerArray<T>::Sort(TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
  1.4272 +/**
  1.4273 +Sorts the object pointers within the array. 
  1.4274 +
  1.4275 +The sort order of the pointers is based on the order of the referenced objects. 
  1.4276 +The referenced object order is determined by an algorithm supplied by the 
  1.4277 +caller and packaged as a TLinerOrder<T>.
  1.4278 +
  1.4279 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.4280 +               of two class T objects.
  1.4281 +*/
  1.4282 +	{ HeapSort(anOrder); }
  1.4283 +
  1.4284 +
  1.4285 +
  1.4286 +
  1.4287 +template <class T>
  1.4288 +inline TArray<T*> RPointerArray<T>::Array() const
  1.4289 +/**
  1.4290 +Constructs and returns a generic array.
  1.4291 +
  1.4292 +@return A generic array representing this array.
  1.4293 +
  1.4294 +@see TArray
  1.4295 +*/
  1.4296 +	{ return TArray<T*>(GetCount,GetElementPtr,(const CBase*)this); }
  1.4297 +#endif
  1.4298 +
  1.4299 +
  1.4300 +
  1.4301 +template <class T>
  1.4302 +void RPointerArray<T>::ResetAndDestroy()
  1.4303 +/**
  1.4304 +Empties the array and deletes the referenced objects.
  1.4305 +
  1.4306 +It frees all memory allocated to the array and resets the internal state so 
  1.4307 +that it is ready to be reused. The function also deletes all of the objects 
  1.4308 +whose pointers are contained by the array.
  1.4309 +
  1.4310 +This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to this function.
  1.4311 +*/
  1.4312 +	{
  1.4313 +	TInt c=Count();
  1.4314 +	T** pE=(T**)Entries();
  1.4315 +	ZeroCount();
  1.4316 +	TInt i;
  1.4317 +	for (i=0; i<c; i++)
  1.4318 +		{
  1.4319 +		delete *pE;
  1.4320 +		pE++;
  1.4321 +		}
  1.4322 +	Reset();
  1.4323 +	}
  1.4324 +
  1.4325 +
  1.4326 +
  1.4327 +// Specialization for RPointerArray<TAny>
  1.4328 +
  1.4329 +/**
  1.4330 +Default C++ constructor.
  1.4331 +
  1.4332 +This constructs an array object for an array of TAny pointers with default
  1.4333 +granularity, which is 8.
  1.4334 +*/
  1.4335 +inline RPointerArray<TAny>::RPointerArray()
  1.4336 +	: RPointerArrayBase()
  1.4337 +	{}
  1.4338 +
  1.4339 +
  1.4340 +
  1.4341 +
  1.4342 +/**
  1.4343 +C++ constructor with granularity.
  1.4344 +
  1.4345 +This constructs an array object for an array of TAny pointers with the specified 
  1.4346 +granularity.
  1.4347 +
  1.4348 +@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
  1.4349 +
  1.4350 +@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive, or greater than or equal
  1.4351 +       to 0x10000000.
  1.4352 +*/
  1.4353 +inline RPointerArray<TAny>::RPointerArray(TInt aGranularity)
  1.4354 +	: RPointerArrayBase(aGranularity)
  1.4355 +	{}
  1.4356 +
  1.4357 +
  1.4358 +
  1.4359 +
  1.4360 +/**
  1.4361 +C++ constructor with minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
  1.4362 +
  1.4363 +This constructs an array object for an array of TAny pointers with the specified 
  1.4364 +minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
  1.4365 +
  1.4366 +@param aMinGrowBy	The minimum growth step of the array. Must be between 1 and
  1.4367 +					65535 inclusive.
  1.4368 +@param aFactor		The factor by which the array grows, multiplied by 256.
  1.4369 +					For example 512 specifies a factor of 2. Must be between 257
  1.4370 +					and 32767 inclusive.
  1.4371 +
  1.4372 +@panic USER 192, if aMinGrowBy<=0 or aMinGrowBy>65535.
  1.4373 +@panic USER 193, if aFactor<=257 or aFactor>32767.
  1.4374 +*/
  1.4375 +inline RPointerArray<TAny>::RPointerArray(TInt aMinGrowBy, TInt aFactor)
  1.4376 +	: RPointerArrayBase(aMinGrowBy, aFactor)
  1.4377 +	{}
  1.4378 +
  1.4379 +
  1.4380 +
  1.4381 +
  1.4382 +inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::Close()
  1.4383 +/**
  1.4384 +Closes the array and frees all memory allocated to it.
  1.4385 +
  1.4386 +The function must be called before this array object goes out of scope.
  1.4387 +
  1.4388 +Note that the function does not delete the objects whose pointers are contained
  1.4389 +in the array.
  1.4390 +*/
  1.4391 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Close();}
  1.4392 +
  1.4393 +
  1.4394 +
  1.4395 +
  1.4396 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::Count() const
  1.4397 +/**
  1.4398 +Gets the number of pointers in the array.
  1.4399 +
  1.4400 +@return The number of pointers in the array.
  1.4401 +*/
  1.4402 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Count(); }
  1.4403 +
  1.4404 +
  1.4405 +
  1.4406 +
  1.4407 +inline TAny* const& RPointerArray<TAny>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
  1.4408 +/**
  1.4409 +Gets a reference to the pointer located at the specified 
  1.4410 +position within the array.
  1.4411 +
  1.4412 +The compiler chooses this option if the returned reference is used in
  1.4413 +an expression where the reference cannot be modified.
  1.4414 +
  1.4415 +@param anIndex The position of the pointer within the array. The
  1.4416 +               position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object
  1.4417 +			   pointer at the beginning of the array.
  1.4418 +
  1.4419 +@return A const reference to the pointer at position anIndex within 
  1.4420 +        the array.
  1.4421 +
  1.4422 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
  1.4423 +       objects currently in the array.
  1.4424 +*/
  1.4425 +	{return At(anIndex);}
  1.4426 +
  1.4427 +
  1.4428 +
  1.4429 +
  1.4430 +inline TAny*& RPointerArray<TAny>::operator[](TInt anIndex)
  1.4431 +/**
  1.4432 +Gets a reference to the pointer located at the specified 
  1.4433 +position within the array.
  1.4434 +
  1.4435 +The compiler chooses this option if the returned reference is used in
  1.4436 +an expression where the reference can be modified.
  1.4437 +
  1.4438 +@param anIndex The position of the pointer within the array. The
  1.4439 +               position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object
  1.4440 +			   pointer at the beginning of the array.
  1.4441 +
  1.4442 +@return A non-const reference to the pointer at position anIndex within 
  1.4443 +        the array.
  1.4444 +
  1.4445 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
  1.4446 +       objects currently in the array.
  1.4447 +*/
  1.4448 +	{return At(anIndex);}
  1.4449 +
  1.4450 +
  1.4451 +
  1.4452 +
  1.4453 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::Append(const TAny* anEntry)
  1.4454 +/**
  1.4455 +Appends an pointer onto the array.
  1.4456 +
  1.4457 +@param anEntry The pointer to be appended.
  1.4458 +
  1.4459 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.4460 +        wide error codes.
  1.4461 +*/
  1.4462 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Append(anEntry); }
  1.4463 +
  1.4464 +
  1.4465 +
  1.4466 +
  1.4467 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::Insert(const TAny* anEntry, TInt aPos)
  1.4468 +/**
  1.4469 +Inserts an pointer into the array at the specified position.
  1.4470 +
  1.4471 +@param anEntry The pointer to be inserted.
  1.4472 +@param aPos    The position within the array where the pointer is to be 
  1.4473 +               inserted. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies
  1.4474 +			   that a pointer is inserted at the beginning of the array.
  1.4475 +
  1.4476 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.4477 +        wide error codes.
  1.4478 +
  1.4479 +@panic USER 131, if aPos is negative, or is greater than the number of object
  1.4480 +       pointers currently in the array.
  1.4481 +*/
  1.4482 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Insert(anEntry,aPos); }
  1.4483 +
  1.4484 +
  1.4485 +
  1.4486 +
  1.4487 +inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::Remove(TInt anIndex)
  1.4488 +/**
  1.4489 +Removes the pointer at the specified position from the array.
  1.4490 +
  1.4491 +Note that the function does not delete the object whose pointer is removed.
  1.4492 +
  1.4493 +@param anIndex The position within the array from where the pointer 
  1.4494 +               is to be removed. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
  1.4495 +			   implies that a pointer at the beginning of the array is to be
  1.4496 +			   removed.
  1.4497 +			   
  1.4498 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
  1.4499 +       objects currently in the array. 
  1.4500 +*/
  1.4501 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Remove(anIndex);}
  1.4502 +
  1.4503 +
  1.4504 +
  1.4505 +
  1.4506 +inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::Compress()
  1.4507 +/**
  1.4508 +Compresses the array down to a minimum.
  1.4509 +
  1.4510 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is just
  1.4511 +sufficient for its contained pointers.
  1.4512 +Subsequently adding a new pointer to the array 
  1.4513 +always results in a re-allocation of memory.
  1.4514 +*/
  1.4515 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Compress();}
  1.4516 +
  1.4517 +
  1.4518 +
  1.4519 +
  1.4520 +inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::Reset()
  1.4521 +/**
  1.4522 +Empties the array.
  1.4523 +
  1.4524 +It frees all memory allocated to the array and resets the internal state so 
  1.4525 +that it is ready to be reused.
  1.4526 +
  1.4527 +This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to this
  1.4528 +function.
  1.4529 +
  1.4530 +Note that the function does not delete the objects whose pointers are contained
  1.4531 +in the array.
  1.4532 +*/
  1.4533 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Reset();}
  1.4534 +
  1.4535 +
  1.4536 +
  1.4537 +
  1.4538 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::Find(const TAny* anEntry) const
  1.4539 +/**
  1.4540 +Finds the first pointer in the array which matches the specified pointer, using
  1.4541 +a sequential search.
  1.4542 +
  1.4543 +Matching is based on the comparison of pointers.
  1.4544 +
  1.4545 +The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There 
  1.4546 +is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
  1.4547 +
  1.4548 +@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
  1.4549 +@return The index of the first matching pointer within the array.
  1.4550 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching pointer can be found.
  1.4551 +*/
  1.4552 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Find(anEntry); }
  1.4553 +
  1.4554 +
  1.4555 +
  1.4556 +
  1.4557 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::FindReverse(const TAny* anEntry) const
  1.4558 +/**
  1.4559 +Finds the last pointer in the array which matches the specified pointer, using
  1.4560 +a sequential search.
  1.4561 +
  1.4562 +Matching is based on the comparison of pointers.
  1.4563 +
  1.4564 +The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There 
  1.4565 +is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
  1.4566 +
  1.4567 +@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
  1.4568 +@return The index of the last matching pointer within the array.
  1.4569 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching pointer can be found.
  1.4570 +*/
  1.4571 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindReverse(anEntry); }
  1.4572 +
  1.4573 +
  1.4574 +
  1.4575 +
  1.4576 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::FindInAddressOrder(const TAny* anEntry) const
  1.4577 +/**
  1.4578 +Finds the pointer in the array that matches the specified object
  1.4579 +pointer, using a binary search technique.
  1.4580 +
  1.4581 +The function assumes that pointers in the array are in address order.
  1.4582 +
  1.4583 +@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
  1.4584 +
  1.4585 +@return The index of the matching pointer within the array or KErrNotFound 
  1.4586 +        if no suitable pointer can be found.
  1.4587 +*/
  1.4588 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry); }
  1.4589 +
  1.4590 +
  1.4591 +
  1.4592 +
  1.4593 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::FindInAddressOrder(const TAny* anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
  1.4594 +/**
  1.4595 +Finds the pointer in the array that matches the specified object
  1.4596 +pointer, using a binary search technique.
  1.4597 +
  1.4598 +The function assumes that pointers in the array are in address order.
  1.4599 +
  1.4600 +@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
  1.4601 +@param anIndex A TInt supplied by the caller. On return, contains an index
  1.4602 +               value:
  1.4603 +               If the function returns KErrNone, this is the index of the
  1.4604 +			   matching pointer within the array. 
  1.4605 +               If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
  1.4606 +			   last pointer within the array which logically
  1.4607 +			   precedes anEntry.
  1.4608 +
  1.4609 +@return KErrNone, if a matching pointer is found.
  1.4610 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable pointer can be found.
  1.4611 +*/
  1.4612 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,anIndex); }
  1.4613 +
  1.4614 +
  1.4615 +
  1.4616 +
  1.4617 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::SpecificFindInAddressOrder(const TAny* anEntry, TInt aMode) const
  1.4618 +/**
  1.4619 +Finds the pointer in the array that matches the specified pointer, using a
  1.4620 +binary search technique.
  1.4621 +
  1.4622 +Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last 
  1.4623 +or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.4624 +
  1.4625 +The function assumes that pointers in the array are in address order.
  1.4626 +
  1.4627 +@param	anEntry The pointer to be found.
  1.4628 +@param	aMode   Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or
  1.4629 +                any match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.4630 +
  1.4631 +@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
  1.4632 +        index of a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the
  1.4633 +        value of aMode:
  1.4634 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.4635 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.4636 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.4637 +        the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
  1.4638 +        the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.4639 +        
  1.4640 +@see TArrayFindMode
  1.4641 +*/
  1.4642 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry, aMode); }
  1.4643 +
  1.4644 +
  1.4645 +
  1.4646 +
  1.4647 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::SpecificFindInAddressOrder(const TAny* anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
  1.4648 +/**
  1.4649 +Finds the pointer in the array that matches the specified pointer, using a
  1.4650 +binary search technique.
  1.4651 +
  1.4652 +Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last
  1.4653 +or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.4654 +
  1.4655 +The function assumes that pointers in the array are in address order.
  1.4656 +
  1.4657 +@param anEntry The pointer to be found.
  1.4658 +@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an
  1.4659 +               index value depending on whether a match is found and on the
  1.4660 +               value of aMode.
  1.4661 +               If there is no matching element in the array, then this is
  1.4662 +               the index of the first element in the array that is bigger than
  1.4663 +               the element being searched for - if no elements in the array are
  1.4664 +               bigger, then the index value is the same as the total number of
  1.4665 +               elements in the array. If there is a matching element, then what
  1.4666 +               the index refers to depends on the value of aMode:
  1.4667 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.4668 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.4669 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows the
  1.4670 +               last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
  1.4671 +               then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.4672 +               
  1.4673 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any
  1.4674 +               match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.4675 +
  1.4676 +@return KErrNone, if a matching pointer is found.
  1.4677 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable pointer can be found.
  1.4678 +        
  1.4679 +@see TArrayFindMode
  1.4680 +*/
  1.4681 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,anIndex,aMode); }
  1.4682 +
  1.4683 +
  1.4684 +
  1.4685 +
  1.4686 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::InsertInAddressOrder(const TAny* anEntry)
  1.4687 +/**
  1.4688 +Inserts an pointer into the array in address order.
  1.4689 +
  1.4690 +No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
  1.4691 +an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
  1.4692 +
  1.4693 +The function assumes that existing pointers within the array are in 
  1.4694 +address order.
  1.4695 +
  1.4696 +@param anEntry The pointer to be inserted.
  1.4697 +
  1.4698 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
  1.4699 +        KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
  1.4700 +        to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
  1.4701 +        error codes.
  1.4702 +*/
  1.4703 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,EFalse); }
  1.4704 +
  1.4705 +
  1.4706 +
  1.4707 +
  1.4708 +inline TInt RPointerArray<TAny>::InsertInAddressOrderAllowRepeats(const TAny* anEntry)
  1.4709 +/**
  1.4710 +Inserts an pointer into the array in address order, allowing duplicates.
  1.4711 +
  1.4712 +If the new pointer is a duplicate of an existing pointer in 
  1.4713 +the array, then the new pointer is inserted after the existing one. If more 
  1.4714 +than one duplicate pointer already exists in the array, then any new 
  1.4715 +duplicate pointer is inserted after the last one.
  1.4716 +
  1.4717 +The function assumes that existing pointers within the array are in 
  1.4718 +address order.
  1.4719 +
  1.4720 +@param anEntry The pointer to be inserted.
  1.4721 +
  1.4722 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.4723 +        wide error codes.
  1.4724 +*/
  1.4725 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned((TUint)anEntry,ETrue); }
  1.4726 +
  1.4727 +
  1.4728 +
  1.4729 +
  1.4730 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.4731 +inline RPointerArray<TAny>::RPointerArray(TAny** aEntries, TInt aCount)
  1.4732 +	: RPointerArrayBase((TAny **)aEntries, aCount)
  1.4733 +/**
  1.4734 +C++ constructor with a pointer to the first array entry in a pre-existing
  1.4735 +array, and the number of entries in that array.
  1.4736 +
  1.4737 +This constructor takes a pointer to a pre-existing set of entries of type TAny*,
  1.4738 +which is owned by another RPointerArray object. Ownership of the set of entries
  1.4739 +still resides with the original RPointerArray object.
  1.4740 +
  1.4741 +@param aEntries A pointer to the first entry of type TAny* in the set of entries
  1.4742 +                belonging to the existing array.                
  1.4743 +@param aCount   The number of entries in the existing array. The granularity of
  1.4744 +                this array is set to this value.
  1.4745 +
  1.4746 +@panic USER 156, if aCount is not positive.
  1.4747 +*/
  1.4748 +	{}
  1.4749 +
  1.4750 +
  1.4751 +
  1.4752 +
  1.4753 +inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::GranularCompress()
  1.4754 +/**
  1.4755 +Compresses the array down to a granular boundary.
  1.4756 +
  1.4757 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient 
  1.4758 +for its contained pointers. Adding new pointers to the array 
  1.4759 +does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of 
  1.4760 +pointers reaches a multiple of the granularity.
  1.4761 +*/
  1.4762 +	{RPointerArrayBase::GranularCompress();}
  1.4763 +
  1.4764 +
  1.4765 +
  1.4766 +
  1.4767 +inline void RPointerArray<TAny>::SortIntoAddressOrder()
  1.4768 +/**
  1.4769 +Sorts the pointers within the array into address order.
  1.4770 +*/
  1.4771 +	{ HeapSortUnsigned(); }
  1.4772 +
  1.4773 +
  1.4774 +
  1.4775 +
  1.4776 +inline TArray<TAny*> RPointerArray<TAny>::Array() const
  1.4777 +/**
  1.4778 +Constructs and returns a generic array.
  1.4779 +
  1.4780 +@return A generic array representing this array.
  1.4781 +
  1.4782 +@see TArray
  1.4783 +*/
  1.4784 +	{ return TArray<TAny*>(GetCount,GetElementPtr,(const CBase*)this); }
  1.4785 +#endif
  1.4786 +
  1.4787 +
  1.4788 +
  1.4789 +template <class T>
  1.4790 +inline RArray<T>::RArray()
  1.4791 +	: RArrayBase(sizeof(T))
  1.4792 +/** 
  1.4793 +Default C++ constructor. 
  1.4794 +
  1.4795 +This constructs an array object for an array of type class T objects with 
  1.4796 +default granularity and key offset value. The default granularity is 8 and 
  1.4797 +the defaul key offset value is zero.
  1.4798 +
  1.4799 +@panic USER 129, if the size of class T is not positive or is not less
  1.4800 +       than 640.
  1.4801 +*/
  1.4802 +	{}
  1.4803 +
  1.4804 +
  1.4805 +
  1.4806 +
  1.4807 +template <class T>
  1.4808 +inline RArray<T>::RArray(TInt aGranularity)
  1.4809 +	: RArrayBase(sizeof(T),aGranularity)
  1.4810 +/**
  1.4811 +C++ constructor with granularity. 
  1.4812 +
  1.4813 +This constructs an array object for an array of type class T objects with 
  1.4814 +a specified granularity and default key offset value. The default key offset 
  1.4815 +value is zero.
  1.4816 +
  1.4817 +@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
  1.4818 +
  1.4819 +@panic USER 129, if the size of class T is not positive or is not less
  1.4820 +       than 640.
  1.4821 +@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive or the product of this
  1.4822 +       value and the size of class T is not less than 0x10000000.
  1.4823 +*/
  1.4824 +	{}
  1.4825 +
  1.4826 +
  1.4827 +
  1.4828 +
  1.4829 +template <class T>
  1.4830 +inline RArray<T>::RArray(TInt aGranularity, TInt aKeyOffset)
  1.4831 +	: RArrayBase(sizeof(T),aGranularity,aKeyOffset)
  1.4832 +/**
  1.4833 +C++ constructor with granularity and key offset.
  1.4834 +
  1.4835 +This constructs an array object for an array of type class T objects with 
  1.4836 +a specified granularity and a specified key offset value.
  1.4837 +
  1.4838 +@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
  1.4839 +@param aKeyOffset   The key offset.
  1.4840 +
  1.4841 +@panic USER 129, if the size of class T is not positive or is not less
  1.4842 +       than 640.
  1.4843 +@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive or the product of this
  1.4844 +       value and the size of class T is not less than 0x10000000.
  1.4845 +@panic USER 128, if aKeyOffset is not positive, or is not less than the 
  1.4846 +       size of class T, or is not a multiple of 4.
  1.4847 +*/
  1.4848 +	{}
  1.4849 +
  1.4850 +
  1.4851 +
  1.4852 +
  1.4853 +/**
  1.4854 +C++ constructor with minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
  1.4855 +
  1.4856 +This constructs an array object for an array of class T objects with the
  1.4857 +specified minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
  1.4858 +
  1.4859 +@param aMinGrowBy	The minimum growth step of the array. Must be between 1 and
  1.4860 +					65535 inclusive.
  1.4861 +@param aKeyOffset   The key offset.
  1.4862 +@param aFactor		The factor by which the array grows, multiplied by 256.
  1.4863 +					For example 512 specifies a factor of 2. Must be between 257
  1.4864 +					and 32767 inclusive.
  1.4865 +
  1.4866 +@panic USER 129, if the size of class T is not positive or is not less than 640.
  1.4867 +@panic USER 128, if aKeyOffset is negative, or is not less than the 
  1.4868 +       size of class T, or is not a multiple of 4.
  1.4869 +@panic USER 192, if aMinGrowBy<=0 or aMinGrowBy>65535.
  1.4870 +@panic USER 193, if aFactor<=257 or aFactor>32767.
  1.4871 +*/
  1.4872 +template <class T>
  1.4873 +inline RArray<T>::RArray(TInt aMinGrowBy, TInt aKeyOffset, TInt aFactor)
  1.4874 +	: RArrayBase(sizeof(T), aMinGrowBy, aKeyOffset, aFactor)
  1.4875 +	{}
  1.4876 +
  1.4877 +
  1.4878 +
  1.4879 +
  1.4880 +template <class T>
  1.4881 +inline RArray<T>::RArray(TInt aEntrySize,T* aEntries, TInt aCount)
  1.4882 +	: RArrayBase(aEntrySize,aEntries,aCount)
  1.4883 +/**
  1.4884 +C++ constructor with size of entry, a pointer to the first array entry in a 
  1.4885 +pre-existing array, and the number of entries in that array.
  1.4886 +
  1.4887 +This constructor takes a pointer to a pre-existing set of entries of type 
  1.4888 +class T objects owned by another RArray object. Ownership of the set of entries 
  1.4889 +still resides with the original RArray object.
  1.4890 +
  1.4891 +This array is assigned a default granularity and key offset value. The default 
  1.4892 +granularity is 8 and the default key offset value is zero.
  1.4893 +
  1.4894 +The purpose of constructing an array in this way is to allow sorting and
  1.4895 +finding operations to be done without further allocation of memory.
  1.4896 +
  1.4897 +@param aEntrySize The size of an entry in the existing array. 
  1.4898 +@param aEntries   A pointer to the first entry of type class T in the set of 
  1.4899 +                  entries belonging to the existing array.
  1.4900 +@param aCount     The number of entries in the existing array.
  1.4901 + 
  1.4902 +@panic USER 129, if aEntrySize is not positive or is not less than 640.
  1.4903 +@panic USER 156, if aCount is not positive.
  1.4904 +*/
  1.4905 +	{}
  1.4906 +
  1.4907 +
  1.4908 +
  1.4909 +
  1.4910 +template <class T>
  1.4911 +inline void RArray<T>::Close()
  1.4912 +/**
  1.4913 +Closes the array and frees all memory allocated to the array. 
  1.4914 +
  1.4915 +The function must be called before this array object is destroyed.
  1.4916 +*/
  1.4917 +	{RArrayBase::Close();}
  1.4918 +
  1.4919 +
  1.4920 +
  1.4921 +
  1.4922 +template <class T>
  1.4923 +inline TInt RArray<T>::Count() const
  1.4924 +/**
  1.4925 +Gets the number of objects in the array.
  1.4926 +
  1.4927 +@return The number of objects in the array.
  1.4928 +*/
  1.4929 +	{return RArrayBase::Count();}
  1.4930 +
  1.4931 +
  1.4932 +
  1.4933 +
  1.4934 +template <class T>
  1.4935 +inline const T& RArray<T>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
  1.4936 +/**
  1.4937 +Gets a reference to an object located at a specified position within the array.
  1.4938 +
  1.4939 +The compiler chooses this function if the returned reference is used in an 
  1.4940 +expression where the reference cannot be modified.
  1.4941 +
  1.4942 +@param anIndex The position of the object within the array. The position is 
  1.4943 +               relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object at the beginning
  1.4944 +			   of the array. 
  1.4945 +
  1.4946 +@return A const reference to the object at position anIndex within the array.
  1.4947 +
  1.4948 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative or is greater than the number of 
  1.4949 +       objects currently in the array
  1.4950 +*/
  1.4951 +	{return *(const T*)At(anIndex); }
  1.4952 +
  1.4953 +
  1.4954 +
  1.4955 +
  1.4956 +template <class T>
  1.4957 +inline T& RArray<T>::operator[](TInt anIndex)
  1.4958 +/**
  1.4959 +Gets a reference to an object located at a specified position within the array.
  1.4960 +
  1.4961 +The compiler chooses this function if the returned reference is used in an 
  1.4962 +expression where the reference can be modified.
  1.4963 +
  1.4964 +@param anIndex The position of the object within the array. The position is 
  1.4965 +               relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the object at the beginning
  1.4966 +			   of the array. 
  1.4967 +
  1.4968 +@return A non-const reference to the object at position anIndex within the array.
  1.4969 +
  1.4970 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative or is greater than the number of 
  1.4971 +       objects currently in the array
  1.4972 +*/
  1.4973 +	{return *(T*)At(anIndex); }
  1.4974 +
  1.4975 +
  1.4976 +
  1.4977 +
  1.4978 +template <class T>
  1.4979 +inline TInt RArray<T>::Append(const T& anEntry)
  1.4980 +/**
  1.4981 +Apends an object onto the array.
  1.4982 +
  1.4983 +@param anEntry    A reference to the object of type class T to be appended.
  1.4984 +
  1.4985 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.4986 +        wide error codes.
  1.4987 +*/
  1.4988 +	{return RArrayBase::Append(&anEntry);}
  1.4989 +
  1.4990 +
  1.4991 +
  1.4992 +
  1.4993 +template <class T>
  1.4994 +inline TInt RArray<T>::Insert(const T& anEntry, TInt aPos)
  1.4995 +/**
  1.4996 +Inserts an object into the array at a specified position.
  1.4997 +
  1.4998 +@param anEntry The class T object to be inserted.
  1.4999 +@param aPos    The position within the array where the object is to
  1.5000 +               be inserted. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
  1.5001 +			   implies that an object is inserted at the beginning of
  1.5002 +			   the array.
  1.5003 +			   
  1.5004 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.5005 +        wide error codes.
  1.5006 +
  1.5007 +@panic USER 131, if aPos is negative or is greater than the number of objects
  1.5008 +       currently in the array.
  1.5009 +*/
  1.5010 +	{return RArrayBase::Insert(&anEntry,aPos);}
  1.5011 +
  1.5012 +
  1.5013 +
  1.5014 +
  1.5015 +template <class T>
  1.5016 +inline void RArray<T>::Remove(TInt anIndex)
  1.5017 +/**
  1.5018 +Removes the object at a specified position from the array.
  1.5019 +
  1.5020 +@param anIndex The position within the array from where the object is to be 
  1.5021 +               removed. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies
  1.5022 +			   that an object at the beginning of the array is to be removed.
  1.5023 +	
  1.5024 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative or is greater than the number of
  1.5025 +       objects currently in the array.
  1.5026 +*/
  1.5027 +	{RArrayBase::Remove(anIndex);}
  1.5028 +
  1.5029 +
  1.5030 +
  1.5031 +
  1.5032 +template <class T>
  1.5033 +inline void RArray<T>::Compress()
  1.5034 +/** 
  1.5035 +Compresses the array down to a minimum.
  1.5036 +
  1.5037 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is just
  1.5038 +sufficient for its contained objects. Subsequently adding a new object to the
  1.5039 +array always results in a re-allocation of memory.
  1.5040 +*/
  1.5041 +	{RArrayBase::Compress();}
  1.5042 +
  1.5043 +
  1.5044 +
  1.5045 +
  1.5046 +template <class T>
  1.5047 +inline void RArray<T>::Reset()
  1.5048 +/**
  1.5049 +Empties the array, so that it is ready to be reused.
  1.5050 +
  1.5051 +The function frees all memory allocated to the array and resets the internal 
  1.5052 +state so that it is ready to be reused.
  1.5053 +
  1.5054 +This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to this function.
  1.5055 +*/
  1.5056 +	{RArrayBase::Reset();}
  1.5057 +
  1.5058 +
  1.5059 +
  1.5060 +
  1.5061 +template <class T>
  1.5062 +inline TInt RArray<T>::Find(const T& anEntry) const
  1.5063 +/**
  1.5064 +Finds the first object in the array which matches the specified object using 
  1.5065 +a sequential search.
  1.5066 +
  1.5067 +Matching is based on the comparison of a TInt value at the key offset position 
  1.5068 +within the objects.
  1.5069 +
  1.5070 +The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There 
  1.5071 +is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
  1.5072 +
  1.5073 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5074 +
  1.5075 +@return The index of the first matching object within the array. 
  1.5076 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching object can be found.
  1.5077 +*/
  1.5078 +	{return RArrayBase::Find(&anEntry);}
  1.5079 +
  1.5080 +
  1.5081 +
  1.5082 +
  1.5083 +template <class T>
  1.5084 +inline TInt RArray<T>::Find(const T& anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) const
  1.5085 +/**
  1.5086 +Finds the first object in the array which matches the specified object using 
  1.5087 +a sequential search and a matching algorithm.
  1.5088 +
  1.5089 +The algorithm for determining whether two class T type objects match is provided 
  1.5090 +by a function supplied by the caller.
  1.5091 +
  1.5092 +The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There 
  1.5093 +is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
  1.5094 +
  1.5095 +@param anEntry    A reference to an object of type class T to be used
  1.5096 +                  for matching.
  1.5097 +@param anIdentity A package encapsulating the function which determines whether 
  1.5098 +                  two class T type objects match.
  1.5099 +
  1.5100 +@return The index of the first matching object within the array.
  1.5101 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching object can be found.
  1.5102 +*/
  1.5103 +	{return RArrayBase::Find(&anEntry,anIdentity);}
  1.5104 +
  1.5105 +
  1.5106 +
  1.5107 +
  1.5108 +template <class T>
  1.5109 +inline TInt RArray<T>::FindReverse(const T& anEntry) const
  1.5110 +/**
  1.5111 +Finds the last object in the array which matches the specified object using 
  1.5112 +a sequential search.
  1.5113 +
  1.5114 +Matching is based on the comparison of a TInt value at the key offset position 
  1.5115 +within the objects.
  1.5116 +
  1.5117 +The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There 
  1.5118 +is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
  1.5119 +
  1.5120 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5121 +
  1.5122 +@return The index of the last matching object within the array. 
  1.5123 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching object can be found.
  1.5124 +*/
  1.5125 +	{return RArrayBase::FindReverse(&anEntry);}
  1.5126 +
  1.5127 +
  1.5128 +
  1.5129 +
  1.5130 +template <class T>
  1.5131 +inline TInt RArray<T>::FindReverse(const T& anEntry, TIdentityRelation<T> anIdentity) const
  1.5132 +/**
  1.5133 +Finds the last object in the array which matches the specified object using 
  1.5134 +a sequential search and a matching algorithm.
  1.5135 +
  1.5136 +The algorithm for determining whether two class T type objects match is provided 
  1.5137 +by a function supplied by the caller.
  1.5138 +
  1.5139 +The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There 
  1.5140 +is no assumption about the order of objects in the array.
  1.5141 +
  1.5142 +@param anEntry    A reference to an object of type class T to be used
  1.5143 +                  for matching.
  1.5144 +@param anIdentity A package encapsulating the function which determines whether 
  1.5145 +                  two class T type objects match.
  1.5146 +
  1.5147 +@return The index of the last matching object within the array.
  1.5148 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching object can be found.
  1.5149 +*/
  1.5150 +	{return RArrayBase::FindReverse(&anEntry,anIdentity);}
  1.5151 +
  1.5152 +
  1.5153 +
  1.5154 +
  1.5155 +template <class T>
  1.5156 +inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInSignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry) const
  1.5157 +/**
  1.5158 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5159 +search technique.
  1.5160 +
  1.5161 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in signed 
  1.5162 +key order.
  1.5163 +
  1.5164 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5165 +
  1.5166 +@return The index of the matching object within the array, or KErrNotFound 
  1.5167 +        if no matching object can be found.
  1.5168 +*/
  1.5169 +	{return RArrayBase::FindIsqSigned(&anEntry);}
  1.5170 +
  1.5171 +
  1.5172 +
  1.5173 +
  1.5174 +template <class T>
  1.5175 +inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInUnsignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry) const
  1.5176 +/**
  1.5177 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5178 +search technique.
  1.5179 +
  1.5180 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in unsigned 
  1.5181 +key order.
  1.5182 +
  1.5183 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5184 +
  1.5185 +@return The index of the matching object within the array, or KErrNotFound 
  1.5186 +        if no matching object can be found.
  1.5187 +*/
  1.5188 +	{return RArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned(&anEntry);}
  1.5189 +
  1.5190 +
  1.5191 +
  1.5192 +
  1.5193 +template <class T>
  1.5194 +inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInOrder(const T& anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder) const
  1.5195 +/**
  1.5196 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5197 +search technique and an ordering algorithm.
  1.5198 +
  1.5199 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object 
  1.5200 +order as determined by an algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as 
  1.5201 +a TLinearOrder<T>.
  1.5202 +
  1.5203 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5204 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.5205 +               of two class T objects.
  1.5206 +
  1.5207 +@return The index of the matching object within the array, or KErrNotFound if 
  1.5208 +        no matching object can be found.
  1.5209 +*/
  1.5210 +	{return RArrayBase::FindIsq(&anEntry,anOrder);}
  1.5211 +
  1.5212 +
  1.5213 +
  1.5214 +
  1.5215 +template <class T>
  1.5216 +inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInSignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
  1.5217 +/**
  1.5218 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5219 +search technique.
  1.5220 +
  1.5221 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in signed 
  1.5222 +key order.
  1.5223 +
  1.5224 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5225 +@param anIndex On return contains an index value. If the function returns KErrNone,
  1.5226 +               this is the index of the matching object within the array.
  1.5227 +               If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
  1.5228 +               first element in the array whose key is bigger than the key of the
  1.5229 +               element being sought. If there are no elements in the array with
  1.5230 +               a bigger key, then the index value is the same as the total 
  1.5231 +               number of elements in the array.
  1.5232 +@return KErrNone if a matching object is found, or KErrNotFound if no matching 
  1.5233 +        object can be found.
  1.5234 +*/
  1.5235 +	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearchSigned(&anEntry,anIndex);}
  1.5236 +
  1.5237 +
  1.5238 +
  1.5239 +
  1.5240 +template <class T>
  1.5241 +inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInUnsignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
  1.5242 +/**
  1.5243 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5244 +search technique.
  1.5245 +
  1.5246 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in unsigned 
  1.5247 +key order.
  1.5248 +
  1.5249 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5250 +@param anIndex On return contains an index value. If the function returns
  1.5251 +               KErrNone, this is the index of the matching object within the
  1.5252 +               array. 
  1.5253 +               If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
  1.5254 +               first element in the array whose key is bigger than the key of the
  1.5255 +               element being sought. If there are no elements in the array with
  1.5256 +               a bigger key, then the index value is the same as the total 
  1.5257 +               number of elements in the array.
  1.5258 +@return KErrNone if a matching object is found, or KErrNotFound if no matching 
  1.5259 +        object can be found.
  1.5260 +*/
  1.5261 +	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned(&anEntry,anIndex);}
  1.5262 +
  1.5263 +
  1.5264 +
  1.5265 +
  1.5266 +template <class T>
  1.5267 +inline TInt RArray<T>::FindInOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder) const
  1.5268 +/**
  1.5269 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5270 +search technique and an ordering algorithm.
  1.5271 +
  1.5272 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object 
  1.5273 +order as determined by an algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as 
  1.5274 +a TLinearOrder<T>.
  1.5275 +
  1.5276 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5277 +@param anIndex On return contains an index value. If the function returns
  1.5278 +               KErrNone, this is the index of the matching object within the
  1.5279 +               array.
  1.5280 +               If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
  1.5281 +               first element in the array that is bigger than the element being
  1.5282 +               searched for - if no elements in the array are bigger, then
  1.5283 +               the index value is the same as the total number of elements in
  1.5284 +               the array.
  1.5285 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.5286 +               of two class T objects.
  1.5287 +
  1.5288 +@return KErrNone if a matching object is found. KErrNotFound if no matching 
  1.5289 +        object can be found.
  1.5290 +*/
  1.5291 +	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearch(&anEntry,anIndex,anOrder);}
  1.5292 +
  1.5293 +
  1.5294 +
  1.5295 +
  1.5296 +template <class T>
  1.5297 +inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInSignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt aMode) const
  1.5298 +/**
  1.5299 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5300 +search technique.
  1.5301 +
  1.5302 +The element ordering is determined by a signed 32-bit word
  1.5303 +(the key) embedded in each array element. In the case that there is more than
  1.5304 +one matching element, finds the first, last or any match as specified by
  1.5305 +the value of aMode.
  1.5306 +
  1.5307 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in signed 
  1.5308 +key order.
  1.5309 +
  1.5310 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5311 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or
  1.5312 +               any match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.5313 +               
  1.5314 +@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
  1.5315 +        index of a matching element -  what the index refers to depends on the
  1.5316 +        value of aMode:
  1.5317 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.5318 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.5319 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.5320 +        the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
  1.5321 +        the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.5322 +        
  1.5323 +@see TArrayFindMode        
  1.5324 +*/
  1.5325 +	{return RArrayBase::FindIsqSigned(&anEntry,aMode);}
  1.5326 +
  1.5327 +
  1.5328 +
  1.5329 +
  1.5330 +template <class T>
  1.5331 +inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInUnsignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt aMode) const
  1.5332 +/**
  1.5333 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5334 +search technique.
  1.5335 +
  1.5336 +The element ordering is determined by an unsigned 32-bit word
  1.5337 +(the key) embedded in each array element. Where there is more than
  1.5338 +one matching element, it finds the first, last or any matching element
  1.5339 +as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.5340 +
  1.5341 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in unsigned 
  1.5342 +key order.
  1.5343 +
  1.5344 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5345 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or
  1.5346 +               any match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.5347 +
  1.5348 +@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
  1.5349 +        index of a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the
  1.5350 +        value of aMode:
  1.5351 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.5352 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.5353 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows the
  1.5354 +        last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
  1.5355 +        then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.5356 +        
  1.5357 +@see TArrayFindMode
  1.5358 +*/
  1.5359 +	{return RArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned(&anEntry,aMode);}
  1.5360 +
  1.5361 +
  1.5362 +
  1.5363 +
  1.5364 +template <class T>
  1.5365 +inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInOrder(const T& anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder, TInt aMode) const
  1.5366 +/**
  1.5367 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5368 +search technique and an ordering algorithm.
  1.5369 +
  1.5370 +Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last
  1.5371 +or any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.5372 +
  1.5373 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object 
  1.5374 +order as determined by an algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as 
  1.5375 +a TLinearOrder<T> type.
  1.5376 +
  1.5377 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5378 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.5379 +               of two class T objects.
  1.5380 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any
  1.5381 +               match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.5382 +
  1.5383 +@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array index
  1.5384 +        of a matching element -  what the index refers to depends on the value of
  1.5385 +        aMode:
  1.5386 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.5387 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.5388 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.5389 +        the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
  1.5390 +        the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.5391 +*/
  1.5392 +	{return RArrayBase::FindIsq(&anEntry,anOrder,aMode);}
  1.5393 +
  1.5394 +
  1.5395 +
  1.5396 +
  1.5397 +template <class T>
  1.5398 +inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInSignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
  1.5399 +/**
  1.5400 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5401 +search technique.
  1.5402 +
  1.5403 +The element ordering is determined by a signed 32-bit word
  1.5404 +(the key) embedded in each array element. Where there is more than
  1.5405 +one matching element, finds the first, last or any matching element as
  1.5406 +specified specified by the value of aMode.
  1.5407 +
  1.5408 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in signed 
  1.5409 +key order.
  1.5410 +
  1.5411 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5412 +@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains
  1.5413 +               an index value depending on whether a match is found and on the
  1.5414 +               value of aMode. If there is no matching element in the array,
  1.5415 +               then this is the index of the first element in the array that
  1.5416 +               is bigger than the element being searched for - if no elements
  1.5417 +               in the array are bigger, then the index value is the same as the
  1.5418 +               total number of elements in the array. If there is a matching
  1.5419 +               element, then what the index refers to depends on the value of aMode:
  1.5420 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.5421 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.5422 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.5423 +               the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
  1.5424 +               the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.5425 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match,
  1.5426 +               as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.5427 +               
  1.5428 +@return	KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found;
  1.5429 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.5430 +*/
  1.5431 +	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearchSigned(&anEntry,anIndex,aMode);}
  1.5432 +
  1.5433 +
  1.5434 +
  1.5435 +
  1.5436 +template <class T>
  1.5437 +inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInUnsignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
  1.5438 +/**
  1.5439 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5440 +search technique.
  1.5441 +
  1.5442 +The element ordering is determined by an unsigned 32-bit word
  1.5443 +(the key) embedded in each array element. Where there is more than
  1.5444 +one matching element, it finds the first, last or any matching element as
  1.5445 +specified by the value of aMode.
  1.5446 +
  1.5447 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in unsigned 
  1.5448 +key order.
  1.5449 +
  1.5450 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5451 +@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an index
  1.5452 +               value depending on whether a match is found and on the value of aMode.
  1.5453 +               If there is no matching element in the array, then this is the index
  1.5454 +               of the first element in the array that is bigger than the element
  1.5455 +               being searched for - if no elements in the array are bigger, then
  1.5456 +               the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.5457 +               If there is a matching element, then what the index refers to depends on
  1.5458 +               the value of aMode:
  1.5459 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.5460 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.5461 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows the
  1.5462 +               last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
  1.5463 +               then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.5464 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match, as defined by one
  1.5465 +               of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.5466 +@return	KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found; KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.5467 +
  1.5468 +@see TArrayFindMode
  1.5469 +*/
  1.5470 +	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned(&anEntry,anIndex,aMode);}
  1.5471 +
  1.5472 +
  1.5473 +
  1.5474 +
  1.5475 +template <class T>
  1.5476 +inline TInt RArray<T>::SpecificFindInOrder(const T& anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder, TInt aMode) const
  1.5477 +/**
  1.5478 +Finds the object in the array which matches the specified object using a binary 
  1.5479 +search technique and a specified ordering algorithm.
  1.5480 +
  1.5481 +Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, the last or
  1.5482 +any matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.5483 +
  1.5484 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object 
  1.5485 +order as determined by an algorithm supplied by the caller and packaged as 
  1.5486 +a TLinearOrder<T> type.
  1.5487 +
  1.5488 +@param anEntry A reference to an object of type class T to be used for matching.
  1.5489 +@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains
  1.5490 +               an index value depending on whether a match is found and on the
  1.5491 +               value of aMode. If there is no matching element in the array,
  1.5492 +               then this is the index of the first element in the array that
  1.5493 +               is bigger than the element being searched for - if no elements
  1.5494 +               in the array are bigger, then the index value is the same as 
  1.5495 +               the total number of elements in the array.
  1.5496 +               If there is a matching element, then what the index refers to
  1.5497 +               depends on the value of aMode:
  1.5498 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.5499 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.5500 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.5501 +               the last matching element - if the last matching element is also
  1.5502 +               the last element of the array, then the index value is the same as
  1.5503 +               the total number of elements in the array.
  1.5504 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.5505 +               of two class T objects.
  1.5506 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match,
  1.5507 +               as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.5508 +@return	KErrNone, if a matching object pointer is found;
  1.5509 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable object pointer can be found.
  1.5510 +
  1.5511 +*/
  1.5512 +	{return RArrayBase::BinarySearch(&anEntry,anIndex,anOrder,aMode);}
  1.5513 +
  1.5514 +
  1.5515 +
  1.5516 +
  1.5517 +template <class T>
  1.5518 +inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInSignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry)
  1.5519 +/**
  1.5520 +Inserts an object into the array in ascending signed key order.
  1.5521 +
  1.5522 +The order of two class T type objects is based on comparing a TInt value
  1.5523 +located at the key offset position within the class T object.
  1.5524 +
  1.5525 +No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
  1.5526 +an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
  1.5527 +
  1.5528 +@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
  1.5529 +
  1.5530 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
  1.5531 +        KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
  1.5532 +        to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
  1.5533 +        error codes.
  1.5534 +*/
  1.5535 +	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsqSigned(&anEntry,EFalse);}
  1.5536 +
  1.5537 +
  1.5538 +
  1.5539 +
  1.5540 +template <class T>
  1.5541 +inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInUnsignedKeyOrder(const T& anEntry)
  1.5542 +/**
  1.5543 +Inserts an object into the array in ascending unsigned key order.
  1.5544 +
  1.5545 +The order of two class T type objects is based on comparing a TUint value 
  1.5546 +located at the key offset position within the class T object. 
  1.5547 +
  1.5548 +No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
  1.5549 +an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
  1.5550 +
  1.5551 +@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
  1.5552 +
  1.5553 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
  1.5554 +        KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
  1.5555 +        to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
  1.5556 +        error codes.
  1.5557 +*/
  1.5558 +	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned(&anEntry,EFalse);}
  1.5559 +
  1.5560 +
  1.5561 +
  1.5562 +
  1.5563 +template <class T>
  1.5564 +inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInOrder(const T& anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
  1.5565 +/**
  1.5566 +Inserts an object of into the array in object order.
  1.5567 +
  1.5568 +The algorithm for determining the order of two class T type objects is provided 
  1.5569 +by a function supplied by the caller.
  1.5570 +
  1.5571 +No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
  1.5572 +an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
  1.5573 +
  1.5574 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object 
  1.5575 +order.
  1.5576 +
  1.5577 +@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
  1.5578 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.5579 +               of two class T objects.
  1.5580 +
  1.5581 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
  1.5582 +        KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
  1.5583 +        to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
  1.5584 +        error codes.
  1.5585 +*/
  1.5586 +	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsq(&anEntry,anOrder,EFalse);}
  1.5587 +
  1.5588 +
  1.5589 +
  1.5590 +
  1.5591 +template <class T>
  1.5592 +inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInSignedKeyOrderAllowRepeats(const T& anEntry)
  1.5593 +/**
  1.5594 +Inserts an object into the array in ascending signed key order,
  1.5595 +allowing duplicates.
  1.5596 +
  1.5597 +The order of two class T type objects is based on comparing a TInt value
  1.5598 +located at the key offset position within the class T object. 
  1.5599 +
  1.5600 +If anEntry is a duplicate of an existing object in the array, then the new 
  1.5601 +object is inserted after the existing object. If more than one duplicate object 
  1.5602 +already exists in the array, then any new duplicate object is inserted after 
  1.5603 +the last one.
  1.5604 +
  1.5605 +@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
  1.5606 +
  1.5607 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.5608 +        wide error codes.
  1.5609 +*/
  1.5610 +	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsqSigned(&anEntry,ETrue);}
  1.5611 +
  1.5612 +
  1.5613 +
  1.5614 +
  1.5615 +template <class T>
  1.5616 +inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInUnsignedKeyOrderAllowRepeats(const T& anEntry)
  1.5617 +/**
  1.5618 +Inserts an object into the array in ascending unsigned key order, allowing 
  1.5619 +duplicates.
  1.5620 +
  1.5621 +The order of two class T type objects is based on comparing a TUint value 
  1.5622 +located at the key offset position within the class T object. 
  1.5623 +
  1.5624 +If anEntry is a duplicate of an existing object in the array, then the new 
  1.5625 +object is inserted after the existing object. If more than one duplicate object 
  1.5626 +already exists in the array, then any new duplicate object is inserted after 
  1.5627 +the last one.
  1.5628 +
  1.5629 +@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
  1.5630 +
  1.5631 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.5632 +        wide error codes. 
  1.5633 +*/
  1.5634 +	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned(&anEntry,ETrue);}
  1.5635 +
  1.5636 +
  1.5637 +
  1.5638 +
  1.5639 +template <class T>
  1.5640 +inline TInt RArray<T>::InsertInOrderAllowRepeats(const T& anEntry, TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
  1.5641 +/**
  1.5642 +Inserts an object into the array in object order, allowing duplicates.
  1.5643 +
  1.5644 +The algorithm for determining the order of two class T type objects is provided 
  1.5645 +by a function supplied by the caller.
  1.5646 +
  1.5647 +If anEntry is a duplicate of an existing object in the array, then the new 
  1.5648 +object is inserted after the existing object. If more than one duplicate object 
  1.5649 +already exists in the array, then anEntry is inserted after the last one.
  1.5650 +
  1.5651 +The function assumes that existing objects within the array are in object 
  1.5652 +order.
  1.5653 +
  1.5654 +@param anEntry A reference to the object of type class T to be inserted.
  1.5655 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.5656 +               of two class T objects.
  1.5657 +
  1.5658 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.5659 +        wide error codes.
  1.5660 +*/
  1.5661 +	{return RArrayBase::InsertIsq(&anEntry,anOrder,ETrue);}
  1.5662 +
  1.5663 +
  1.5664 +
  1.5665 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.5666 +
  1.5667 +template <class T>
  1.5668 +inline void RArray<T>::GranularCompress()
  1.5669 +/**
  1.5670 +Compresses the array down to a granular boundary.
  1.5671 +
  1.5672 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient 
  1.5673 +for its contained objects. Adding new objects to the array does not result 
  1.5674 +in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of objects reaches 
  1.5675 +a multiple of the granularity.
  1.5676 +*/
  1.5677 +	{RArrayBase::GranularCompress();}
  1.5678 +
  1.5679 +
  1.5680 +
  1.5681 +
  1.5682 +template <class T>
  1.5683 +inline TInt RArray<T>::Reserve(TInt aCount)
  1.5684 +/**
  1.5685 +Reserves space for the specified number of elements.
  1.5686 +
  1.5687 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient 
  1.5688 +to hold the number of objects specified. Adding new objects to the array 
  1.5689 +does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of 
  1.5690 +objects exceeds the specified count.
  1.5691 +
  1.5692 +@param	aCount	The number of objects for which space should be reserved
  1.5693 +@return	KErrNone		If the operation completed successfully
  1.5694 +@return KErrNoMemory	If the requested amount of memory could not be allocated
  1.5695 +*/
  1.5696 +	{ return RArrayBase::DoReserve(aCount); }
  1.5697 +
  1.5698 +
  1.5699 +
  1.5700 +
  1.5701 +template <class T>
  1.5702 +inline void RArray<T>::SortSigned()
  1.5703 +/**
  1.5704 +Sorts the objects within the array; the sort order is assumed to be in signed 
  1.5705 +integer order.
  1.5706 +*/
  1.5707 +	{HeapSortSigned();}
  1.5708 +
  1.5709 +
  1.5710 +
  1.5711 +
  1.5712 +template <class T>
  1.5713 +inline void RArray<T>::SortUnsigned()
  1.5714 +/**
  1.5715 +Sorts the objects within the array; the sort order is assumed to be in unsigned 
  1.5716 +integer order.
  1.5717 +*/
  1.5718 +	{HeapSortUnsigned();}
  1.5719 +
  1.5720 +
  1.5721 +
  1.5722 +
  1.5723 +template <class T>
  1.5724 +inline void RArray<T>::Sort(TLinearOrder<T> anOrder)
  1.5725 +/**
  1.5726 +Sorts the objects within the array using the specified TLinearOrder. 
  1.5727 +
  1.5728 +The sort order is determined by an algorithm supplied by the caller and
  1.5729 +packaged as a TLinerOrder<T>.
  1.5730 +
  1.5731 +@param anOrder A package encapsulating the function which determines the order 
  1.5732 +               of two class T type objects.
  1.5733 +*/
  1.5734 +	{HeapSort(anOrder);}
  1.5735 +
  1.5736 +
  1.5737 +
  1.5738 +
  1.5739 +template <class T>
  1.5740 +inline TArray<T> RArray<T>::Array() const
  1.5741 +/**
  1.5742 +Constructs and returns a generic array.
  1.5743 +
  1.5744 +@return A generic array representing this array.
  1.5745 +*/
  1.5746 +	{ return TArray<T>(GetCount,GetElementPtr,(const CBase*)this); }
  1.5747 +#endif
  1.5748 +
  1.5749 +
  1.5750 +
  1.5751 +
  1.5752 +inline RArray<TInt>::RArray()
  1.5753 +	: RPointerArrayBase()
  1.5754 +/**
  1.5755 +Constructs an array object for an array of signed integers with
  1.5756 +default granularity. 
  1.5757 +
  1.5758 +The default granularity is 8. 
  1.5759 +*/
  1.5760 +	{}
  1.5761 +
  1.5762 +
  1.5763 +
  1.5764 +
  1.5765 +inline RArray<TInt>::RArray(TInt aGranularity)
  1.5766 +	: RPointerArrayBase(aGranularity)
  1.5767 +/**
  1.5768 +Constructs an array object for an array of signed integers with the specified 
  1.5769 +granularity.
  1.5770 +	
  1.5771 +@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
  1.5772 +
  1.5773 +@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive or is greater than or
  1.5774 +       equal to 0x10000000.
  1.5775 +*/
  1.5776 +	{}
  1.5777 +
  1.5778 +
  1.5779 +
  1.5780 +
  1.5781 +/**
  1.5782 +C++ constructor with minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
  1.5783 +
  1.5784 +This constructs an array object for an array of signed integers with the
  1.5785 +specified minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
  1.5786 +
  1.5787 +@param aMinGrowBy	The minimum growth step of the array. Must be between 1 and
  1.5788 +					65535 inclusive.
  1.5789 +@param aFactor		The factor by which the array grows, multiplied by 256.
  1.5790 +					For example 512 specifies a factor of 2. Must be between 257
  1.5791 +					and 32767 inclusive.
  1.5792 +
  1.5793 +@panic USER 192, if aMinGrowBy<=0 or aMinGrowBy>65535.
  1.5794 +@panic USER 193, if aFactor<=257 or aFactor>32767.
  1.5795 +*/
  1.5796 +inline RArray<TInt>::RArray(TInt aMinGrowBy, TInt aFactor)
  1.5797 +	: RPointerArrayBase(aMinGrowBy, aFactor)
  1.5798 +	{}
  1.5799 +
  1.5800 +
  1.5801 +
  1.5802 +
  1.5803 +inline void RArray<TInt>::Close()
  1.5804 +/**
  1.5805 +Closes the array and frees all memory allocated to the array.
  1.5806 +	
  1.5807 +The function must be called before this array object goes out of scope. 
  1.5808 +*/
  1.5809 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Close();}
  1.5810 +
  1.5811 +
  1.5812 +
  1.5813 +
  1.5814 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::Count() const
  1.5815 +/**
  1.5816 +Gets the number of signed integers in the array.
  1.5817 +	
  1.5818 +@return The number of signed integers in the array.
  1.5819 +*/
  1.5820 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Count(); }
  1.5821 +
  1.5822 +
  1.5823 +
  1.5824 +
  1.5825 +inline const TInt& RArray<TInt>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
  1.5826 +/**
  1.5827 +Gets a reference to the signed integer located at a specified position within 
  1.5828 +the array.
  1.5829 +	
  1.5830 +The compiler chooses this function if the returned reference is used in an 
  1.5831 +expression where the reference cannot be modified.
  1.5832 +	
  1.5833 +@param anIndex The position of the signed integer within the array. The
  1.5834 +               position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the entry
  1.5835 +			   at the beginning of the array. 
  1.5836 +
  1.5837 +@return A const reference to the signed integer at position anIndex within 
  1.5838 +        the array.
  1.5839 +
  1.5840 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of 
  1.5841 +	   entries currently in the array.
  1.5842 +*/
  1.5843 +	{return (const TInt&)At(anIndex);}
  1.5844 +
  1.5845 +
  1.5846 +
  1.5847 +
  1.5848 +inline TInt& RArray<TInt>::operator[](TInt anIndex)
  1.5849 +/**
  1.5850 +Gets a reference to the signed integer located at a specified position within 
  1.5851 +the array.
  1.5852 +	
  1.5853 +The compiler chooses this function if the returned reference is used in an 
  1.5854 +expression where the reference can be modified.
  1.5855 +	
  1.5856 +@param anIndex The position of the signed integer within the array. The
  1.5857 +               position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies the entry
  1.5858 +			   at the beginning of the array. 
  1.5859 +
  1.5860 +@return A non-const reference to the signed integer at position anIndex within 
  1.5861 +        the array.
  1.5862 +
  1.5863 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of 
  1.5864 +	   entries currently in the array.
  1.5865 +*/
  1.5866 +	{return (TInt&)At(anIndex);}
  1.5867 +
  1.5868 +
  1.5869 +
  1.5870 +
  1.5871 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::Append(TInt anEntry)
  1.5872 +/**
  1.5873 +Appends a signed integer onto the array.
  1.5874 +	
  1.5875 +@param anEntry The signed integer to be appended.
  1.5876 +	
  1.5877 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.5878 +	    wide error codes.
  1.5879 +*/
  1.5880 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Append((const TAny*)anEntry); }
  1.5881 +
  1.5882 +
  1.5883 +
  1.5884 +
  1.5885 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::Insert(TInt anEntry, TInt aPos)
  1.5886 +/**
  1.5887 +Inserts a signed integer into the array at the specified position.
  1.5888 +	
  1.5889 +@param anEntry The signed integer to be inserted.
  1.5890 +@param aPos    The position within the array where the signed integer is to be 
  1.5891 +	           inserted. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero implies
  1.5892 +			   that an entry is inserted at the beginning of the array.
  1.5893 +			   
  1.5894 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.5895 +	    wide error codes.
  1.5896 +
  1.5897 +@panic USER 131, if aPos is negative, or is greater than the number of entries
  1.5898 +       currently in the array.
  1.5899 +*/
  1.5900 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Insert((const TAny*)anEntry,aPos); }
  1.5901 +
  1.5902 +
  1.5903 +
  1.5904 +
  1.5905 +inline void RArray<TInt>::Remove(TInt anIndex)
  1.5906 +/**
  1.5907 +Removes the signed integer at the specified position from the array.
  1.5908 +	
  1.5909 +@param anIndex The position within the array from where the signed integer 
  1.5910 +	           is to be removed. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
  1.5911 +			   implies that an entry at the beginning of the array is to be
  1.5912 +			   removed. 
  1.5913 +
  1.5914 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative or is greater than the number of
  1.5915 +       entries currently in the array.
  1.5916 +*/
  1.5917 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Remove(anIndex);}
  1.5918 +
  1.5919 +
  1.5920 +
  1.5921 +
  1.5922 +inline void RArray<TInt>::Compress()
  1.5923 +/**
  1.5924 +Compresses the array down to a minimum.
  1.5925 +	
  1.5926 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is just
  1.5927 +sufficient for its entries. Subsequently adding a new signed integer to the
  1.5928 +array always results in a re-allocation of memory.
  1.5929 +*/
  1.5930 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Compress();}
  1.5931 +
  1.5932 +
  1.5933 +
  1.5934 +
  1.5935 +inline void RArray<TInt>::Reset()
  1.5936 +/**
  1.5937 +Empties the array.
  1.5938 +
  1.5939 +The function frees all memory allocated to the array and 
  1.5940 +resets the internal state so that it is ready to be reused.
  1.5941 +	
  1.5942 +This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to this
  1.5943 +function.
  1.5944 +*/
  1.5945 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Reset();}
  1.5946 +
  1.5947 +
  1.5948 +
  1.5949 +
  1.5950 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::Find(TInt anEntry) const
  1.5951 +/**
  1.5952 +Finds the first signed integer in the array which matches the specified signed 
  1.5953 +integer using a sequential search.
  1.5954 +	
  1.5955 +The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There 
  1.5956 +is no assumption about the order of entries in the array.
  1.5957 +	
  1.5958 +@param anEntry The signed integer to be found.
  1.5959 +
  1.5960 +@return The index of the first matching signed integer within the array.
  1.5961 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching entry can be found.
  1.5962 +*/
  1.5963 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Find((const TAny*)anEntry); }
  1.5964 +
  1.5965 +
  1.5966 +
  1.5967 +
  1.5968 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::FindReverse(TInt anEntry) const
  1.5969 +/**
  1.5970 +Finds the last signed integer in the array which matches the specified signed 
  1.5971 +integer using a sequential search.
  1.5972 +	
  1.5973 +The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There 
  1.5974 +is no assumption about the order of entries in the array.
  1.5975 +	
  1.5976 +@param anEntry The signed integer to be found.
  1.5977 +
  1.5978 +@return The index of the last matching signed integer within the array.
  1.5979 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching entry can be found.
  1.5980 +*/
  1.5981 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindReverse((const TAny*)anEntry); }
  1.5982 +
  1.5983 +
  1.5984 +
  1.5985 +
  1.5986 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::FindInOrder(TInt anEntry) const
  1.5987 +/**
  1.5988 +Finds the signed integer in the array that matches the specified signed integer 
  1.5989 +using a binary search technique.
  1.5990 +	
  1.5991 +The function assumes that the array is in signed integer order.
  1.5992 +	
  1.5993 +@param anEntry The signed integer to find.
  1.5994 +
  1.5995 +@return The index of the matching signed integer within the array or KErrNotFound, 
  1.5996 +        if no match can be found.
  1.5997 +*/
  1.5998 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqSigned(anEntry); }
  1.5999 +
  1.6000 +
  1.6001 +
  1.6002 +
  1.6003 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::FindInOrder(TInt anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
  1.6004 +/**
  1.6005 +Finds the signed integer in the array that matches the specified signed integer
  1.6006 +using a binary search technique.
  1.6007 +	
  1.6008 +The function assumes that the array is in signed integer order.
  1.6009 +	
  1.6010 +@param anEntry The signed integer to find.
  1.6011 +@param anIndex A TInt suplied by the caller. On return contains an index value.
  1.6012 +               If the function returns KErrNone, this is the index of the
  1.6013 +               matching signed integer within the array.   
  1.6014 +               If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
  1.6015 +               first signed integer within the array that is bigger than the
  1.6016 +               signed integer being searched for - if no signed integers within
  1.6017 +               the array are bigger, then the index value is the same as the
  1.6018 +               total number of signed integers within the array.
  1.6019 +
  1.6020 +@return KErrNone if a matching signed integer is found.
  1.6021 +        KErrNotFound if no  match can be found.
  1.6022 +*/
  1.6023 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchSigned(anEntry,anIndex); }
  1.6024 +
  1.6025 +
  1.6026 +
  1.6027 +
  1.6028 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::SpecificFindInOrder(TInt anEntry, TInt aMode) const
  1.6029 +/**
  1.6030 +Finds the signed integer in the array that matches the specified signed integer 
  1.6031 +using a binary search technique.
  1.6032 +
  1.6033 +Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, last or any
  1.6034 +matching element as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.6035 +	
  1.6036 +The function assumes that the array is in signed integer order.
  1.6037 +	
  1.6038 +@param anEntry The signed integer to be found.
  1.6039 +@param aMode   Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any
  1.6040 +               match, as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.6041 +
  1.6042 +@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array
  1.6043 +        index of a matching element -  what the index refers to depends on the
  1.6044 +        value of aMode:
  1.6045 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.6046 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.6047 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.6048 +        the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element
  1.6049 +        of the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in
  1.6050 +        the array.
  1.6051 +
  1.6052 +@see TArrayFindMode         
  1.6053 +*/
  1.6054 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqSigned(anEntry,aMode); }
  1.6055 +
  1.6056 +
  1.6057 +
  1.6058 +
  1.6059 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::SpecificFindInOrder(TInt anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
  1.6060 +/**
  1.6061 +Finds the signed integer in the array that matches the specified signed integer
  1.6062 +using a binary search technique.
  1.6063 +
  1.6064 +Where there is more than one matching element, it finds the first, last or any 
  1.6065 +matching element  as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.6066 +
  1.6067 +The function assumes that the array is in signed integer order.
  1.6068 +	
  1.6069 +@param anEntry The signed integer to be found.
  1.6070 +@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an index
  1.6071 +               value depending on whether a match is found and on the value of aMode.
  1.6072 +               If there is no matching element in the array, then this is the  index of
  1.6073 +               the first element in the array that is bigger than the element being
  1.6074 +               searched for - if no elements in the array are bigger, then the index
  1.6075 +               value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.6076 +               If there is a matching element, then what the index refers to depends
  1.6077 +               on the value of aMode:
  1.6078 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.6079 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.6080 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.6081 +               the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element
  1.6082 +               of the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.6083 +               
  1.6084 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match,
  1.6085 +               as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.6086 +               
  1.6087 +@return KErrNone, if a matching element is found; 
  1.6088 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable element can be found.               
  1.6089 +        
  1.6090 +@see TArrayFindMode
  1.6091 +*/
  1.6092 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchSigned(anEntry,anIndex,aMode); }
  1.6093 +
  1.6094 +
  1.6095 +
  1.6096 +
  1.6097 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::InsertInOrder(TInt anEntry)
  1.6098 +/**
  1.6099 +Inserts a signed integer into the array in signed integer order.
  1.6100 +	
  1.6101 +No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
  1.6102 +an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
  1.6103 +	
  1.6104 +The function assumes that existing entries within the array are in signed 
  1.6105 +integer order.
  1.6106 +	
  1.6107 +@param anEntry The signed integer to be inserted
  1.6108 +
  1.6109 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
  1.6110 +        KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
  1.6111 +        to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
  1.6112 +        error codes.
  1.6113 +*/
  1.6114 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqSigned(anEntry,EFalse); }
  1.6115 +
  1.6116 +
  1.6117 +
  1.6118 +
  1.6119 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::InsertInOrderAllowRepeats(TInt anEntry)
  1.6120 +/**
  1.6121 +Inserts a signed integer into the array in signed integer order,
  1.6122 +allowing duplicates.
  1.6123 +	
  1.6124 +If anEntry is a duplicate of an existing entry in the array, then the new 
  1.6125 +signed integer is inserted after the existing one. If more than one duplicate 
  1.6126 +entry already exists in the array, then any new duplicate signed integer is 
  1.6127 +inserted after the last one.
  1.6128 +	
  1.6129 +The function assumes that existing entries within the array are in signed 
  1.6130 +integer order.
  1.6131 +	
  1.6132 +@param anEntry The signed integer to be inserted.
  1.6133 +
  1.6134 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.6135 +        wide error codes.
  1.6136 +*/
  1.6137 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqSigned(anEntry,ETrue); }
  1.6138 +
  1.6139 +
  1.6140 +
  1.6141 +
  1.6142 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.6143 +inline RArray<TInt>::RArray(TInt* aEntries, TInt aCount)
  1.6144 +	: RPointerArrayBase((TAny**)aEntries, aCount)
  1.6145 +/**
  1.6146 +C++ constructor with a pointer to the first array entry in a 
  1.6147 +pre-existing array, and the number of entries in that array.
  1.6148 +
  1.6149 +This constructor takes a pointer to a pre-existing set of entries of type 
  1.6150 +TInt objects. Ownership of the set of entries does not transfer to
  1.6151 +this RArray object.
  1.6152 +
  1.6153 +The purpose of constructing an array in this way is to allow sorting and
  1.6154 +finding operations to be done without further allocation of memory.
  1.6155 +
  1.6156 +@param aEntries   A pointer to the first entry of type class TInt in the set of 
  1.6157 +                  entries belonging to the existing array.
  1.6158 +@param aCount     The number of entries in the existing array.
  1.6159 +*/
  1.6160 +	{}
  1.6161 +
  1.6162 +inline void RArray<TInt>::GranularCompress()
  1.6163 +/**
  1.6164 +Compresses the array down to a granular boundary.
  1.6165 +	
  1.6166 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient 
  1.6167 +for its contained entries. Adding new signed integers to the array does not 
  1.6168 +result in a re-allocation of memory until the total number of entries reaches 
  1.6169 +a multiple of the granularity.
  1.6170 +*/
  1.6171 +	{RPointerArrayBase::GranularCompress();}
  1.6172 +
  1.6173 +
  1.6174 +
  1.6175 +
  1.6176 +inline TInt RArray<TInt>::Reserve(TInt aCount)
  1.6177 +/**
  1.6178 +Reserves space for the specified number of elements.
  1.6179 +
  1.6180 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient 
  1.6181 +to hold the number of integers specified. Adding new integers to the array 
  1.6182 +does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of 
  1.6183 +integers exceeds the specified count.
  1.6184 +
  1.6185 +@param	aCount	The number of integers for which space should be reserved
  1.6186 +@return	KErrNone		If the operation completed successfully
  1.6187 +@return KErrNoMemory	If the requested amount of memory could not be allocated
  1.6188 +*/
  1.6189 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::DoReserve(aCount); }
  1.6190 +
  1.6191 +
  1.6192 +
  1.6193 +
  1.6194 +inline void RArray<TInt>::Sort()
  1.6195 +/**
  1.6196 +Sorts the array entries into signed integer order.
  1.6197 +*/
  1.6198 +	{ HeapSortSigned(); }
  1.6199 +
  1.6200 +
  1.6201 +
  1.6202 +
  1.6203 +inline TArray<TInt> RArray<TInt>::Array() const
  1.6204 +/**
  1.6205 +Constructs and returns a generic array.
  1.6206 +	
  1.6207 +@return A generic array representing this array.
  1.6208 +
  1.6209 +@see TArray
  1.6210 +*/
  1.6211 +	{ return TArray<TInt>(GetCount,GetElementPtr,(const CBase*)this); }
  1.6212 +#endif
  1.6213 +
  1.6214 +
  1.6215 +
  1.6216 +inline RArray<TUint>::RArray()
  1.6217 +	: RPointerArrayBase()
  1.6218 +/**
  1.6219 +Default C++ constructor.
  1.6220 +
  1.6221 +This constructs an array object for an array of unsigned 
  1.6222 +integers with default granularity.
  1.6223 +
  1.6224 +The default granularity of the array is 8.
  1.6225 +*/
  1.6226 +	{}
  1.6227 +
  1.6228 +
  1.6229 +
  1.6230 +
  1.6231 +inline RArray<TUint>::RArray(TInt aGranularity)
  1.6232 +	: RPointerArrayBase(aGranularity)
  1.6233 +/**
  1.6234 +Constructs an array object for an array of unsigned integers with the specified 
  1.6235 +granularity.
  1.6236 +	
  1.6237 +@param aGranularity The granularity of the array.
  1.6238 +
  1.6239 +@panic USER 127, if aGranularity is not positive or is greater than or
  1.6240 +       equal to 0x10000000.
  1.6241 +*/
  1.6242 +	{}
  1.6243 +
  1.6244 +
  1.6245 +
  1.6246 +
  1.6247 +/**
  1.6248 +C++ constructor with minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
  1.6249 +
  1.6250 +This constructs an array object for an array of unsigned integers with the
  1.6251 +specified minimum growth step and exponential growth factor.
  1.6252 +
  1.6253 +@param aMinGrowBy	The minimum growth step of the array. Must be between 1 and
  1.6254 +					65535 inclusive.
  1.6255 +@param aFactor		The factor by which the array grows, multiplied by 256.
  1.6256 +					For example 512 specifies a factor of 2. Must be between 257
  1.6257 +					and 32767 inclusive.
  1.6258 +
  1.6259 +@panic USER 192, if aMinGrowBy<=0 or aMinGrowBy>65535.
  1.6260 +@panic USER 193, if aFactor<=257 or aFactor>32767.
  1.6261 +*/
  1.6262 +inline RArray<TUint>::RArray(TInt aMinGrowBy, TInt aFactor)
  1.6263 +	: RPointerArrayBase(aMinGrowBy, aFactor)
  1.6264 +	{}
  1.6265 +
  1.6266 +
  1.6267 +
  1.6268 +
  1.6269 +inline void RArray<TUint>::Close()
  1.6270 +/**
  1.6271 +Closes the array and frees all memory allocated to the array.
  1.6272 +	
  1.6273 +The function must be called before this array object goes out of scope.
  1.6274 +*/
  1.6275 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Close();}
  1.6276 +
  1.6277 +
  1.6278 +
  1.6279 +
  1.6280 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::Count() const
  1.6281 +/**
  1.6282 +Gets the number of unsigned integers in the array.
  1.6283 +
  1.6284 +@return The number of unsigned integers in the array.
  1.6285 +*/
  1.6286 +	{return RPointerArrayBase::Count(); }
  1.6287 +
  1.6288 +
  1.6289 +
  1.6290 +
  1.6291 +inline const TUint& RArray<TUint>::operator[](TInt anIndex) const
  1.6292 +/**
  1.6293 +Gets a reference to the unsigned integer located at the specified position 
  1.6294 +within the array.
  1.6295 +	
  1.6296 +The compiler uses this variant if the returned reference is used in an
  1.6297 +expression where the reference cannot be modified.
  1.6298 +	
  1.6299 +@param anIndex The position of the unsigned integer within the array, relative 
  1.6300 +	           to zero, i.e. zero implies the entry at the beginning of
  1.6301 +			   the array.
  1.6302 +
  1.6303 +@return A reference to the const unsigned integer at position anIndex within 
  1.6304 +        the array.
  1.6305 +
  1.6306 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
  1.6307 +       entries currently in the array.
  1.6308 +*/
  1.6309 +	{return (const TUint&)At(anIndex);}
  1.6310 +
  1.6311 +
  1.6312 +
  1.6313 +
  1.6314 +inline TUint& RArray<TUint>::operator[](TInt anIndex)
  1.6315 +/**
  1.6316 +Gets a reference to the unsigned integer located at the specified position 
  1.6317 +within the array.
  1.6318 +	
  1.6319 +The compiler uses this variant if the returned reference is used in an
  1.6320 +expression where the reference can be modified.
  1.6321 +	
  1.6322 +@param anIndex The position of the unsigned integer within the array, relative 
  1.6323 +	           to zero, i.e. zero implies the entry at the beginning of
  1.6324 +			   the array.
  1.6325 +
  1.6326 +@return A reference to the non-const unsigned integer at position anIndex
  1.6327 +        within the array.
  1.6328 +
  1.6329 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
  1.6330 +       entries currently in the array.
  1.6331 +*/
  1.6332 +	{return (TUint&)At(anIndex);}
  1.6333 +
  1.6334 +
  1.6335 +
  1.6336 +
  1.6337 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::Append(TUint anEntry)
  1.6338 +/**
  1.6339 +Appends an unsigned integer onto the array.
  1.6340 +	
  1.6341 +@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be appended.
  1.6342 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.6343 +        wide error codes.
  1.6344 +*/
  1.6345 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Append((const TAny*)anEntry); }
  1.6346 +
  1.6347 +
  1.6348 +
  1.6349 +
  1.6350 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::Insert(TUint anEntry, TInt aPos)
  1.6351 +/**
  1.6352 +Inserts an unsigned integer into the array at the specified position.
  1.6353 +	
  1.6354 +@param anEntry  The unsigned integer to be inserted.
  1.6355 +@param aPos     The position within the array where the unsigned integer is to 
  1.6356 +	            be inserted. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
  1.6357 +				implies that an entry is inserted at the beginning of
  1.6358 +				the array.
  1.6359 +			
  1.6360 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.6361 +        wide error codes.
  1.6362 +
  1.6363 +@panic USER 131, if aPos is negative, or is greater than the number of entries
  1.6364 +       currently in the array.
  1.6365 +*/
  1.6366 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Insert((const TAny*)anEntry,aPos); }
  1.6367 +
  1.6368 +
  1.6369 +
  1.6370 +
  1.6371 +inline void RArray<TUint>::Remove(TInt anIndex)
  1.6372 +/**
  1.6373 +Removes the unsigned integer at the specified position from the array.
  1.6374 +	
  1.6375 +@param anIndex The position within the array from where the unsigned integer 
  1.6376 +               is to be removed. The position is relative to zero, i.e. zero
  1.6377 +			   implies that an entry at the beginning of the array is to be
  1.6378 +			   removed. 
  1.6379 +			   
  1.6380 +				 
  1.6381 +@panic USER 130, if anIndex is negative, or is greater than the number of
  1.6382 +       entries currently in the array.
  1.6383 +*/
  1.6384 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Remove(anIndex);}
  1.6385 +
  1.6386 +
  1.6387 +
  1.6388 +
  1.6389 +inline void RArray<TUint>::Compress()
  1.6390 +/**
  1.6391 +Compresses the array down to a minimum.
  1.6392 +	
  1.6393 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is just
  1.6394 +sufficient for its entries. Subsequently adding a new unsigned integer to the
  1.6395 +array always results in a re-allocation of memory.
  1.6396 +*/
  1.6397 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Compress();}
  1.6398 +
  1.6399 +
  1.6400 +
  1.6401 +
  1.6402 +inline void RArray<TUint>::Reset()
  1.6403 +/**
  1.6404 +Empties the array.
  1.6405 +
  1.6406 +It frees all memory allocated to the array and resets the 
  1.6407 +internal state so that it is ready to be reused.
  1.6408 +	
  1.6409 +This array object can be allowed to go out of scope after a call to
  1.6410 +this function.
  1.6411 +*/
  1.6412 +	{RPointerArrayBase::Reset();}
  1.6413 +
  1.6414 +
  1.6415 +
  1.6416 +
  1.6417 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::Find(TUint anEntry) const
  1.6418 +/**
  1.6419 +Finds the first unsigned integer in the array which matches the specified
  1.6420 +value, using a sequential search.
  1.6421 +	
  1.6422 +The find operation always starts at the low index end of the array. There 
  1.6423 +is no assumption about the order of entries in the array.
  1.6424 +	
  1.6425 +@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found.
  1.6426 +
  1.6427 +@return The index of the first matching unsigned integer within the array.
  1.6428 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching entry can be found.
  1.6429 +*/
  1.6430 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::Find((const TAny*)anEntry); }
  1.6431 +
  1.6432 +
  1.6433 +
  1.6434 +
  1.6435 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::FindReverse(TUint anEntry) const
  1.6436 +/**
  1.6437 +Finds the last unsigned integer in the array which matches the specified
  1.6438 +value, using a sequential search.
  1.6439 +	
  1.6440 +The find operation always starts at the high index end of the array. There 
  1.6441 +is no assumption about the order of entries in the array.
  1.6442 +	
  1.6443 +@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found.
  1.6444 +
  1.6445 +@return The index of the last matching unsigned integer within the array.
  1.6446 +        KErrNotFound, if no matching entry can be found.
  1.6447 +*/
  1.6448 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindReverse((const TAny*)anEntry); }
  1.6449 +
  1.6450 +
  1.6451 +
  1.6452 +
  1.6453 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::FindInOrder(TUint anEntry) const
  1.6454 +/**
  1.6455 +Finds the unsigned integer in the array which matches the specified value, 
  1.6456 +using a binary search technique.
  1.6457 +	
  1.6458 +The functions assume that existing entries within the array are in unsigned 
  1.6459 +integer order.
  1.6460 +	
  1.6461 +@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found.
  1.6462 +
  1.6463 +@return This is either: the index of the matching unsigned integer within the 
  1.6464 +     	array;
  1.6465 +		KErrNotFound, if no suitable entry can be found.
  1.6466 +*/
  1.6467 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned(anEntry); }
  1.6468 +
  1.6469 +
  1.6470 +
  1.6471 +
  1.6472 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::FindInOrder(TUint anEntry, TInt& anIndex) const
  1.6473 +/**
  1.6474 +Finds the unsigned integer in the array which matches the specified value, 
  1.6475 +using a binary search technique.
  1.6476 +
  1.6477 +If the index cannot be found, the function returns the index of the last
  1.6478 +unsigned integer within the array which logically precedes anEntry.
  1.6479 +	
  1.6480 +The functions assume that existing entries within the array are in unsigned 
  1.6481 +integer order.
  1.6482 +	
  1.6483 +@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found.
  1.6484 +@param anIndex A TInt supplied by the caller. On return, contains an index
  1.6485 +               value.
  1.6486 +               If the function returns KErrNone, this is the index of the
  1.6487 +               matching unsigned integer within the array.               
  1.6488 +               If the function returns KErrNotFound, this is the index of the
  1.6489 +               first unsigned integer within the array that is bigger than the
  1.6490 +               unsigned integer being searched for - if no unsigned integers within
  1.6491 +               the array are bigger, then the index value is the same as the
  1.6492 +               total number of unsigned integers within the array.
  1.6493 +@return KErrNone, if a matching unsigned integer is found. 
  1.6494 +        KErrNotFound, if no suitable entry can be found.
  1.6495 +*/
  1.6496 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned(anEntry,anIndex); }
  1.6497 +
  1.6498 +
  1.6499 +
  1.6500 +
  1.6501 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::SpecificFindInOrder(TUint anEntry, TInt aMode) const
  1.6502 +/**
  1.6503 +Finds the unsigned integer in the array that matches the specified unsigned integer 
  1.6504 +using a binary search technique.
  1.6505 +
  1.6506 +In the case that there is more than one matching element, finds the first, last
  1.6507 +or any match as specified by the value of aMode.
  1.6508 +	
  1.6509 +The function assumes that the array is in unsigned integer order.
  1.6510 +	
  1.6511 +@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found..
  1.6512 +@param aMode   Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match,
  1.6513 +               as defined by one of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.6514 +
  1.6515 +@return KErrNotFound, if there is no matching element, otherwise the array index of
  1.6516 +        a matching element - what the index refers to depends on the value of
  1.6517 +        aMode:
  1.6518 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.6519 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.6520 +        if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.6521 +        the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of
  1.6522 +        the array, then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.6523 +        
  1.6524 +@see TArrayFindMode
  1.6525 +*/
  1.6526 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::FindIsqUnsigned(anEntry,aMode); }
  1.6527 +
  1.6528 +
  1.6529 +
  1.6530 +
  1.6531 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::SpecificFindInOrder(TUint anEntry, TInt& anIndex, TInt aMode) const
  1.6532 +/**
  1.6533 +Finds the unsigned integer in the array that matches the specified unsigned integer
  1.6534 +using a binary search technique.
  1.6535 +
  1.6536 +In the case that there is more than one matching element, finds the first, last or any match as specified.
  1.6537 +
  1.6538 +The function assumes that the array is in unsigned integer order.
  1.6539 +	
  1.6540 +@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be found.
  1.6541 +@param anIndex A TInt type supplied by the caller. On return, it contains an index
  1.6542 +               value depending on whether a match is found and on the value of aMode.
  1.6543 +               If there is no matching element in the array, then this is the  index
  1.6544 +               of the first element in the array that is bigger than the element being
  1.6545 +               searched for - if no elements in the array are bigger, then the index
  1.6546 +               value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.6547 +               If there is a matching element, then what the index refers to depends
  1.6548 +               on the value of aMode:
  1.6549 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_First, then the index refers to the first matching element;
  1.6550 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Any, then the index can refer to any of the matching elements;
  1.6551 +               if this is EArrayFindMode_Last, then the index refers to first element that follows
  1.6552 +               the last matching element - if the last matching element is also the last element of the array,
  1.6553 +               then the index value is the same as the total number of elements in the array.
  1.6554 +@param	aMode  Specifies whether to find the first match, the last match or any match, as defined by one
  1.6555 +               of the TArrayFindMode enum values.
  1.6556 +               
  1.6557 +@return	KErrNone, if a matching entry is found; KErrNotFound, if no matching entry exists.
  1.6558 +
  1.6559 +@see TArrayFindMode
  1.6560 +*/
  1.6561 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::BinarySearchUnsigned(anEntry,anIndex,aMode); }
  1.6562 +
  1.6563 +
  1.6564 +
  1.6565 +
  1.6566 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::InsertInOrder(TUint anEntry)
  1.6567 +/**
  1.6568 +Inserts an unsigned integer into the array in unsigned integer order.
  1.6569 +	
  1.6570 +No duplicate entries are permitted. The array remains unchanged following
  1.6571 +an attempt to insert a duplicate entry.
  1.6572 +	
  1.6573 +The function assumes that existing entries within the array are in unsigned 
  1.6574 +integer order.
  1.6575 +	
  1.6576 +@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be inserted.
  1.6577 +
  1.6578 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful;
  1.6579 +        KErrAlreadyExists, if an attempt is being made
  1.6580 +        to insert a duplicate entry; otherwise one of the other system wide
  1.6581 +        error codes.
  1.6582 +*/
  1.6583 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned(anEntry,EFalse); }
  1.6584 +
  1.6585 +
  1.6586 +
  1.6587 +
  1.6588 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::InsertInOrderAllowRepeats(TUint anEntry)
  1.6589 +/**
  1.6590 +Inserts an unsigned integer into the array in unsigned integer order, allowing 
  1.6591 +duplicates.
  1.6592 +	
  1.6593 +If the new integer is a duplicate of an existing entry in the array, then 
  1.6594 +the new unsigned integer is inserted after the existing one. If more than 
  1.6595 +one duplicate entry already exists in the array, then any new duplicate
  1.6596 +unsigned integer is inserted after the last one.
  1.6597 +	
  1.6598 +The function assumes that existing entries within the array are in unsigned 
  1.6599 +integer order.
  1.6600 +	
  1.6601 +@param anEntry The unsigned integer to be inserted.
  1.6602 +
  1.6603 +@return KErrNone, if the insertion is successful, otherwise one of the system 
  1.6604 +        wide error codes.
  1.6605 +*/
  1.6606 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::InsertIsqUnsigned(anEntry,ETrue); }
  1.6607 +
  1.6608 +
  1.6609 +
  1.6610 +
  1.6611 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.6612 +inline RArray<TUint>::RArray(TUint* aEntries, TInt aCount)
  1.6613 +	: RPointerArrayBase((TAny**)aEntries, aCount)
  1.6614 +/**
  1.6615 +C++ constructor with a pointer to the first array entry in a 
  1.6616 +pre-existing array, and the number of entries in that array.
  1.6617 +
  1.6618 +This constructor takes a pointer to a pre-existing set of entries of type 
  1.6619 +TUint objects. Ownership of the set of entries does not transfer to
  1.6620 +this RArray object.
  1.6621 +
  1.6622 +The purpose of constructing an array in this way is to allow sorting and
  1.6623 +finding operations to be done without further allocation of memory.
  1.6624 +
  1.6625 +@param aEntries   A pointer to the first entry of type class TUint in the set of 
  1.6626 +                  entries belonging to the existing array.
  1.6627 +@param aCount     The number of entries in the existing array.
  1.6628 +*/
  1.6629 +	{}
  1.6630 +
  1.6631 +
  1.6632 +
  1.6633 +inline void RArray<TUint>::GranularCompress()
  1.6634 +/**
  1.6635 +Compresses the array down to a granular boundary.
  1.6636 +	
  1.6637 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient 
  1.6638 +for its contained entries. Adding new unsigned integers to the array does not 
  1.6639 +result in a re-allocation of memory until the total number of entries reaches 
  1.6640 +a multiple of the granularity.
  1.6641 +*/
  1.6642 +	{RPointerArrayBase::GranularCompress();}
  1.6643 +
  1.6644 +
  1.6645 +
  1.6646 +
  1.6647 +inline TInt RArray<TUint>::Reserve(TInt aCount)
  1.6648 +/**
  1.6649 +Reserves space for the specified number of elements.
  1.6650 +
  1.6651 +After a call to this function, the memory allocated to the array is sufficient 
  1.6652 +to hold the number of integers specified. Adding new integers to the array 
  1.6653 +does not result in a re-allocation of memory until the the total number of 
  1.6654 +integers exceeds the specified count.
  1.6655 +
  1.6656 +@param	aCount	The number of integers for which space should be reserved
  1.6657 +@return	KErrNone		If the operation completed successfully
  1.6658 +@return KErrNoMemory	If the requested amount of memory could not be allocated
  1.6659 +*/
  1.6660 +	{ return RPointerArrayBase::DoReserve(aCount); }
  1.6661 +
  1.6662 +
  1.6663 +
  1.6664 +
  1.6665 +inline void RArray<TUint>::Sort()
  1.6666 +/**
  1.6667 +Sorts the array entries into unsigned integer order.
  1.6668 +*/
  1.6669 +	{ HeapSortUnsigned(); }
  1.6670 +
  1.6671 +
  1.6672 +
  1.6673 +
  1.6674 +inline TArray<TUint> RArray<TUint>::Array() const
  1.6675 +/**
  1.6676 +Constructs and returns a generic array.
  1.6677 +	
  1.6678 +@return A generic array representing this array.
  1.6679 +
  1.6680 +@see TArray
  1.6681 +*/
  1.6682 +	{ return TArray<TUint>(GetCount,GetElementPtr,(const CBase*)this); }
  1.6683 +#endif
  1.6684 +
  1.6685 +
  1.6686 +
  1.6687 +
  1.6688 +/**
  1.6689 +Sets an argument to default value and type.
  1.6690 +*/
  1.6691 +inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt,TNothing)
  1.6692 +	{}
  1.6693 +
  1.6694 +
  1.6695 +
  1.6696 +
  1.6697 +/**
  1.6698 +Sets an argument value of TInt type.
  1.6699 +
  1.6700 +@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
  1.6701 +              into which the argument value is to be placed.
  1.6702 +              This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
  1.6703 +@param aValue The argument value.              
  1.6704 +*/
  1.6705 +inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,TInt aValue)
  1.6706 +	{
  1.6707 +	iArgs[aIndex] = aValue;
  1.6708 +	iFlags |= EUnspecified<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
  1.6709 +	}
  1.6710 +
  1.6711 +
  1.6712 +
  1.6713 +
  1.6714 +/**
  1.6715 +Sets an argument value of TAny* type.
  1.6716 +
  1.6717 +@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
  1.6718 +              into which the argument value is to be placed.
  1.6719 +              This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
  1.6720 +@param aValue The argument value.              
  1.6721 +*/
  1.6722 +inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,const TAny* aValue)
  1.6723 +	{
  1.6724 +	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue;
  1.6725 +	iFlags |= EUnspecified<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
  1.6726 +	}
  1.6727 +
  1.6728 +
  1.6729 +
  1.6730 +
  1.6731 +/**
  1.6732 +Sets an argument value of RHandleBase type.
  1.6733 +
  1.6734 +@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
  1.6735 +              into which the argument value is to be placed.
  1.6736 +              This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
  1.6737 +@param aValue The argument value.              
  1.6738 +*/
  1.6739 +inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,RHandleBase aValue)
  1.6740 +	{
  1.6741 +	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue.Handle();
  1.6742 +	iFlags |= EHandle<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
  1.6743 +	}
  1.6744 +
  1.6745 +
  1.6746 +
  1.6747 +
  1.6748 +/**
  1.6749 +Sets an argument value TDesC8* type.
  1.6750 +
  1.6751 +@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
  1.6752 +              into which the argument value is to be placed.
  1.6753 +              This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
  1.6754 +@param aValue The argument value.              
  1.6755 +*/
  1.6756 +inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,const TDesC8* aValue)
  1.6757 +	{
  1.6758 +	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue;
  1.6759 +	iFlags |= EDesC8<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
  1.6760 +	}
  1.6761 +
  1.6762 +
  1.6763 +
  1.6764 +
  1.6765 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.6766 +
  1.6767 +/**
  1.6768 +Sets an argument value of TDesC16* type.
  1.6769 +
  1.6770 +@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
  1.6771 +              into which the argument value is to be placed.
  1.6772 +              This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
  1.6773 +@param aValue The argument value.              
  1.6774 +*/
  1.6775 +inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,const TDesC16* aValue)
  1.6776 +	{
  1.6777 +	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue;
  1.6778 +	iFlags |= EDesC16<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
  1.6779 +	}
  1.6780 +
  1.6781 +#endif
  1.6782 +
  1.6783 +
  1.6784 +
  1.6785 +
  1.6786 +/**
  1.6787 +Sets an argument value of TDes8* type.
  1.6788 +
  1.6789 +@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
  1.6790 +              into which the argument value is to be placed.
  1.6791 +              This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
  1.6792 +@param aValue The argument value.              
  1.6793 +*/
  1.6794 +inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,TDes8* aValue)
  1.6795 +	{
  1.6796 +	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue;
  1.6797 +	iFlags |= EDes8<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
  1.6798 +	}
  1.6799 +
  1.6800 +
  1.6801 +
  1.6802 +
  1.6803 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.6804 +
  1.6805 +/**
  1.6806 +Sets an argument value of TDes16* type.
  1.6807 +
  1.6808 +@param aIndex An index value that identifies the slot in the array of arguments
  1.6809 +              into which the argument value is to be placed.
  1.6810 +              This must be a value in the range 0 to 3.
  1.6811 +@param aValue The argument value.              
  1.6812 +*/
  1.6813 +inline void TIpcArgs::Set(TInt aIndex,TDes16* aValue)
  1.6814 +	{
  1.6815 +	iArgs[aIndex] = (TInt)aValue;
  1.6816 +	iFlags |= EDes16<<(aIndex*KBitsPerType);
  1.6817 +	}
  1.6818 +
  1.6819 +#endif
  1.6820 +
  1.6821 +
  1.6822 +
  1.6823 +
  1.6824 +inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(TNothing)
  1.6825 +	{ return EUnspecified; }
  1.6826 +inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(TInt)
  1.6827 +	{ return EUnspecified; }
  1.6828 +inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(const TAny*)
  1.6829 +	{ return EUnspecified; }
  1.6830 +inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(RHandleBase)
  1.6831 +	{ return EHandle; }
  1.6832 +inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(const TDesC8*)
  1.6833 +	{ return EDesC8; }
  1.6834 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.6835 +inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(const TDesC16*)
  1.6836 +	{ return EDesC16; }
  1.6837 +#endif
  1.6838 +inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(TDes8*)
  1.6839 +	{ return EDes8; }
  1.6840 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.6841 +inline TIpcArgs::TArgType TIpcArgs::Type(TDes16*)
  1.6842 +	{ return EDes16; }
  1.6843 +#endif
  1.6844 +inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt&,TIpcArgs::TNothing)
  1.6845 +	{}
  1.6846 +inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,TInt aValue)
  1.6847 +	{ aArg = aValue; }
  1.6848 +inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,const TAny* aValue)
  1.6849 +	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue; }
  1.6850 +inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,RHandleBase aValue)
  1.6851 +	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue.Handle(); }
  1.6852 +inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,const TDesC8* aValue)
  1.6853 +	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue; }
  1.6854 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.6855 +inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,const TDesC16* aValue)
  1.6856 +	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue; }
  1.6857 +#endif
  1.6858 +inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,TDes8* aValue)
  1.6859 +	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue; }
  1.6860 +#ifndef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.6861 +inline void TIpcArgs::Assign(TInt& aArg,TDes16* aValue)
  1.6862 +	{ aArg = (TInt)aValue; }
  1.6863 +#endif
  1.6864 +
  1.6865 +
  1.6866 +
  1.6867 +// Structures for passing 64 bit integers and doubles across GCC/EABI boundaries
  1.6868 +
  1.6869 +inline SInt64::SInt64()
  1.6870 +	{}
  1.6871 +
  1.6872 +inline SInt64::SInt64(Int64 a)
  1.6873 +	{
  1.6874 +	iData[0] = (TUint32)((Uint64)a);
  1.6875 +	iData[1] = (TUint32)(((Uint64)a)>>32);
  1.6876 +	}
  1.6877 +
  1.6878 +inline SInt64& SInt64::operator=(Int64 a)
  1.6879 +	{
  1.6880 +	iData[0] = (TUint32)((Uint64)a);
  1.6881 +	iData[1] = (TUint32)(((Uint64)a)>>32);
  1.6882 +	return *this;
  1.6883 +	}
  1.6884 +
  1.6885 +inline SInt64::operator Int64() const
  1.6886 +	{
  1.6887 +	Int64 x;
  1.6888 +	TUint32* px = (TUint32*)&x;
  1.6889 +	px[0] = iData[0];
  1.6890 +	px[1] = iData[1];
  1.6891 +	return x;
  1.6892 +	}
  1.6893 +
  1.6894 +inline SUint64::SUint64()
  1.6895 +	{}
  1.6896 +
  1.6897 +inline SUint64::SUint64(Uint64 a)
  1.6898 +	{
  1.6899 +	iData[0] = (TUint32)a;
  1.6900 +	iData[1] = (TUint32)(a>>32);
  1.6901 +	}
  1.6902 +
  1.6903 +inline SUint64& SUint64::operator=(Uint64 a)
  1.6904 +	{
  1.6905 +	iData[0] = (TUint32)a;
  1.6906 +	iData[1] = (TUint32)(a>>32);
  1.6907 +	return *this;
  1.6908 +	}
  1.6909 +
  1.6910 +inline SUint64::operator Uint64() const
  1.6911 +	{
  1.6912 +	Uint64 x;
  1.6913 +	TUint32* px = (TUint32*)&x;
  1.6914 +	px[0] = iData[0];
  1.6915 +	px[1] = iData[1];
  1.6916 +	return x;
  1.6917 +	}
  1.6918 +
  1.6919 +inline SDouble::SDouble()
  1.6920 +	{}
  1.6921 +
  1.6922 +inline SDouble::SDouble(TReal a)
  1.6923 +	{
  1.6924 +	const TUint32* pa = (const TUint32*)&a;
  1.6925 +#ifdef __DOUBLE_WORDS_SWAPPED__
  1.6926 +	iData[0] = pa[1];
  1.6927 +	iData[1] = pa[0];	// compiler puts MS word of double first
  1.6928 +#else
  1.6929 +	iData[0] = pa[0];
  1.6930 +	iData[1] = pa[1];	// compiler puts MS word of double second
  1.6931 +#endif
  1.6932 +	}
  1.6933 +
  1.6934 +inline SDouble& SDouble::operator=(TReal a)
  1.6935 +	{
  1.6936 +	new (this) SDouble(a);
  1.6937 +	return *this;
  1.6938 +	}
  1.6939 +
  1.6940 +inline SDouble::operator TReal() const
  1.6941 +	{
  1.6942 +	TReal x;
  1.6943 +	TUint32* px = (TUint32*)&x;
  1.6944 +#ifdef __DOUBLE_WORDS_SWAPPED__
  1.6945 +	px[1] = iData[0];
  1.6946 +	px[0] = iData[1];	// compiler puts MS word of double first
  1.6947 +#else
  1.6948 +	px[0] = iData[0];
  1.6949 +	px[1] = iData[1];	// compiler puts MS word of double second
  1.6950 +#endif
  1.6951 +	return x;
  1.6952 +	}
  1.6953 +
  1.6954 +//
  1.6955 +// TSecureId
  1.6956 +//
  1.6957 +
  1.6958 +/** Default constructor. This leaves the object in an undefined state */
  1.6959 +inline TSecureId::TSecureId()
  1.6960 +	{}
  1.6961 +
  1.6962 +/** Construct 'this' using a TUint32
  1.6963 +@param aId The value for the ID */
  1.6964 +inline TSecureId::TSecureId(TUint32 aId)
  1.6965 +	: iId(aId) {}
  1.6966 +
  1.6967 +/** Convert 'this' into a TUint32
  1.6968 +*/
  1.6969 +inline TSecureId::operator TUint32() const
  1.6970 +	{ return iId; }
  1.6971 +
  1.6972 +/** Construct 'this' using a TUid
  1.6973 +@param aId The value for the ID */
  1.6974 +inline TSecureId::TSecureId(TUid aId)
  1.6975 +	: iId(aId.iUid) {}
  1.6976 +
  1.6977 +/** Convert 'this' into a TUid
  1.6978 +*/
  1.6979 +inline TSecureId::operator TUid() const
  1.6980 +	{ return (TUid&)iId; }
  1.6981 +
  1.6982 +//
  1.6983 +// SSecureId
  1.6984 +//
  1.6985 +inline const TSecureId* SSecureId::operator&() const
  1.6986 +	{ return (const TSecureId*)this; }
  1.6987 +inline SSecureId::operator const TSecureId&() const
  1.6988 +	{ return (const TSecureId&)iId; }
  1.6989 +inline SSecureId::operator TUint32() const
  1.6990 +	{ return iId; }
  1.6991 +inline SSecureId::operator TUid() const
  1.6992 +	{ return (TUid&)iId; }
  1.6993 +
  1.6994 +//
  1.6995 +// TVendorId
  1.6996 +//
  1.6997 +
  1.6998 +/** Default constructor which leaves the object in an undefined state */
  1.6999 +inline TVendorId::TVendorId()
  1.7000 +	{}
  1.7001 +
  1.7002 +/** Construct 'this' using a TUint32
  1.7003 +@param aId The value for the ID */
  1.7004 +inline TVendorId::TVendorId(TUint32 aId)
  1.7005 +	: iId(aId) {}
  1.7006 +
  1.7007 +/** Convert 'this' into a TUint32
  1.7008 +*/
  1.7009 +inline TVendorId::operator TUint32() const
  1.7010 +	{ return iId; }
  1.7011 +
  1.7012 +/** Construct 'this' using a TUid
  1.7013 +@param aId The value for the ID */
  1.7014 +inline TVendorId::TVendorId(TUid aId)
  1.7015 +	: iId(aId.iUid) {}
  1.7016 +
  1.7017 +/** Convert 'this' into a TUid
  1.7018 +*/
  1.7019 +inline TVendorId::operator TUid() const
  1.7020 +	{ return (TUid&)iId; }
  1.7021 +
  1.7022 +//
  1.7023 +// SSecureId
  1.7024 +//
  1.7025 +inline const TVendorId* SVendorId::operator&() const
  1.7026 +	{ return (const TVendorId*)this; }
  1.7027 +inline SVendorId::operator const TVendorId&() const
  1.7028 +	{ return (const TVendorId&)iId; }
  1.7029 +inline SVendorId::operator TUint32() const
  1.7030 +	{ return iId; }
  1.7031 +inline SVendorId::operator TUid() const
  1.7032 +	{ return (TUid&)iId; }
  1.7033 +
  1.7034 +//
  1.7035 +// TSharedChunkBufConfigBase
  1.7036 +// 
  1.7037 +inline TSharedChunkBufConfigBase::TSharedChunkBufConfigBase()
  1.7038 +	{memset(this,0,sizeof(TSharedChunkBufConfigBase));}
  1.7039 +
  1.7040 +/**
  1.7041 +Default constructor. This leaves the set in an undefned state.
  1.7042 +*/
  1.7043 +inline TCapabilitySet::TCapabilitySet()
  1.7044 +	{}
  1.7045 +
  1.7046 +/**
  1.7047 +Construct a set consisting of a single capability.
  1.7048 +@param aCapability The single capability
  1.7049 +*/
  1.7050 +inline TCapabilitySet::TCapabilitySet(TCapability aCapability)
  1.7051 +	{ new (this) TCapabilitySet(aCapability, aCapability); }
  1.7052 +
  1.7053 +/**
  1.7054 +Make this set consist of a single capability.
  1.7055 +@param aCapability The single capability.
  1.7056 +*/
  1.7057 +inline void TCapabilitySet::Set(TCapability aCapability)
  1.7058 +	{ new (this) TCapabilitySet(aCapability, aCapability); }
  1.7059 +
  1.7060 +/**
  1.7061 +Make this set consist of two capabilities.
  1.7062 +@param aCapability1 The first capability.
  1.7063 +@param aCapability2 The second capability.
  1.7064 +*/
  1.7065 +inline void TCapabilitySet::Set(TCapability aCapability1, TCapability aCapability2)
  1.7066 +	{ new (this) TCapabilitySet(aCapability1, aCapability2); }
  1.7067 +
  1.7068 +
  1.7069 +/**
  1.7070 +Default constructor. This leaves the object in an undefned state.
  1.7071 +*/
  1.7072 +inline TSecurityInfo::TSecurityInfo()
  1.7073 +	{}
  1.7074 +
  1.7075 +/** Constructs a TSecurityPolicy that will always fail, irrespective of the
  1.7076 +checked object's attributes.
  1.7077 +*/
  1.7078 +inline TSecurityPolicy::TSecurityPolicy()
  1.7079 +	{ new (this) TSecurityPolicy(EAlwaysFail); }
  1.7080 +
  1.7081 +/**
  1.7082 +'Address of' operator which generates a TSecurityPolicy*
  1.7083 +@return A pointer of type TSecurityPolicy which refers to this object
  1.7084 +*/
  1.7085 +inline const TSecurityPolicy* TStaticSecurityPolicy::operator&() const
  1.7086 +	{ return (const TSecurityPolicy*)this; }
  1.7087 +
  1.7088 +/**
  1.7089 +'Reference of' operator which generates a TSecurityPolicy&
  1.7090 +@return A reference of type TSecurityPolicy which refers to this object
  1.7091 +*/
  1.7092 +inline TStaticSecurityPolicy::operator const TSecurityPolicy&() const
  1.7093 +	{ return *(const TSecurityPolicy*)this; }
  1.7094 +
  1.7095 +/**
  1.7096 +A method to explicity generate a TSecurityPolicy reference.
  1.7097 +@return A reference of type TSecurityPolicy which refers to this object
  1.7098 +*/
  1.7099 +inline const TSecurityPolicy& TStaticSecurityPolicy::operator()() const
  1.7100 +	{ return *(const TSecurityPolicy*)this; }
  1.7101 +
  1.7102 +#ifdef __KERNEL_MODE__
  1.7103 +#ifndef __REMOVE_PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRINGS__
  1.7104 +
  1.7105 +/** Checks this policy against the platform security attributes of aProcess.
  1.7106 +
  1.7107 +	When a check fails the action taken is determined by the system wide Platform Security
  1.7108 +	configuration. If PlatSecDiagnostics is ON, then a diagnostic message is emitted.
  1.7109 +	If PlatSecEnforcement is OFF, then this function will return ETrue even though the
  1.7110 +	check failed.
  1.7111 +
  1.7112 +@param aProcess The DProcess object to check against this TSecurityPolicy.
  1.7113 +@param aDiagnostic A string that will be emitted along with any diagnostic message
  1.7114 +							that may be issued if the policy check fails.
  1.7115 +							This string must be enclosed in the __PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRING macro
  1.7116 +							which enables it to be easily removed from the system.
  1.7117 +@return ETrue if all the requirements of this TSecurityPolicy are met by the
  1.7118 +platform security attributes of aProcess, EFalse otherwise.
  1.7119 +@panic KERN-COMMON 190 if 'this' is an invalid SSecurityInfo object
  1.7120 +*/
  1.7121 +inline TBool TSecurityPolicy::CheckPolicy(DProcess* aProcess, const char* aDiagnostic) const
  1.7122 +	{
  1.7123 +	return DoCheckPolicy(aProcess, aDiagnostic);
  1.7124 +	}
  1.7125 +
  1.7126 +/** Checks this policy against the platform security attributes of the process
  1.7127 +owning aThread.
  1.7128 +
  1.7129 +	When a check fails the action taken is determined by the system wide Platform Security
  1.7130 +	configuration. If PlatSecDiagnostics is ON, then a diagnostic message is emitted.
  1.7131 +	If PlatSecEnforcement is OFF, then this function will return ETrue even though the
  1.7132 +	check failed.
  1.7133 +
  1.7134 +@param aThread The thread whose owning process' platform security attributes
  1.7135 +are to be checked against this TSecurityPolicy.
  1.7136 +@param aDiagnostic A string that will be emitted along with any diagnostic message
  1.7137 +							that may be issued if the policy check fails.
  1.7138 +							This string must be enclosed in the __PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRING macro
  1.7139 +							which enables it to be easily removed from the system.
  1.7140 +@return ETrue if all the requirements of this TSecurityPolicy are met by the
  1.7141 +platform security parameters of the owning process of aThread, EFalse otherwise.
  1.7142 +@panic KERN-COMMON 190 if 'this' is an invalid SSecurityInfo object
  1.7143 +*/
  1.7144 +inline TBool TSecurityPolicy::CheckPolicy(DThread* aThread, const char* aDiagnostic) const
  1.7145 +	{
  1.7146 +	return DoCheckPolicy(aThread, aDiagnostic);
  1.7147 +	}
  1.7148 +
  1.7149 +#else //__REMOVE_PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRINGS__
  1.7150 +
  1.7151 +/** Checks this policy against the platform security attributes of aProcess.
  1.7152 +
  1.7153 +	When a check fails the action taken is determined by the system wide Platform Security
  1.7154 +	configuration. If PlatSecDiagnostics is ON, then a diagnostic message is emitted.
  1.7155 +	If PlatSecEnforcement is OFF, then this function will return ETrue even though the
  1.7156 +	check failed.
  1.7157 +
  1.7158 +@param aProcess The DProcess object to check against this TSecurityPolicy.
  1.7159 +@param aDiagnostic A string that will be emitted along with any diagnostic message
  1.7160 +							that may be issued if the policy check fails.
  1.7161 +							This string must be enclosed in the __PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRING macro
  1.7162 +							which enables it to be easily removed from the system.
  1.7163 +@return ETrue if all the requirements of this TSecurityPolicy are met by the
  1.7164 +platform security attributes of aProcess, EFalse otherwise.
  1.7165 +@panic KERN-COMMON 190 if 'this' is an invalid SSecurityInfo object
  1.7166 +*/
  1.7167 +inline TBool TSecurityPolicy::CheckPolicy(DProcess* aProcess, OnlyCreateWithNull /*aDiagnostic*/) const
  1.7168 +	{
  1.7169 +	return DoCheckPolicy(aProcess);
  1.7170 +	}
  1.7171 +
  1.7172 +/** Checks this policy against the platform security attributes of the process
  1.7173 +owning aThread.
  1.7174 +
  1.7175 +	When a check fails the action taken is determined by the system wide Platform Security
  1.7176 +	configuration. If PlatSecDiagnostics is ON, then a diagnostic message is emitted.
  1.7177 +	If PlatSecEnforcement is OFF, then this function will return ETrue even though the
  1.7178 +	check failed.
  1.7179 +
  1.7180 +@param aThread The thread whose owning process' platform security attributes
  1.7181 +are to be checked against this TSecurityPolicy.
  1.7182 +@param aDiagnostic A string that will be emitted along with any diagnostic message
  1.7183 +							that may be issued if the policy check fails.
  1.7184 +							This string must be enclosed in the __PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRING macro
  1.7185 +							which enables it to be easily removed from the system.
  1.7186 +@return ETrue if all the requirements of this TSecurityPolicy are met by the
  1.7187 +platform security parameters of the owning process of aThread, EFalse otherwise.
  1.7188 +@panic KERN-COMMON 190 if 'this' is an invalid SSecurityInfo object
  1.7189 +*/
  1.7190 +inline TBool TSecurityPolicy::CheckPolicy(DThread* aThread, OnlyCreateWithNull /*aDiagnostic*/) const
  1.7191 +	{
  1.7192 +	return DoCheckPolicy(aThread);
  1.7193 +	}
  1.7194 +
  1.7195 +#endif // !__REMOVE_PLATSEC_DIAGNOSTIC_STRINGS__
  1.7196 +#endif // __KERNEL_MODE__